sports wagon. the bmw 3 series - automecanico.netbmw recommends using parts and accesso‐ ries...

Owner's Manualfor Vehicle

The UltimateDriving Machine

THE BMW 3 SERIESSPORTS WAGON.

OWNER'S MANUAL.

ContentsA-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 925 793 - II/14

3 Series Owner's Manual for VehicleThank you for choosing a BMW.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better controlyou will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐tains important information on vehicle operation that will helpyou make full use of the technical features available in yourBMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute tomaintaining the value of your BMW.Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed orIntegrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of theprinted quick reference for the vehicle.Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐chures in the onboard literature.We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.BMW AG


© 2014 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the writtenconsent of BMW AG, Munich.US English II/14, 03 14 490Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleachedwithout chlorine, suitable for recycling.


ContentsThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic or item is by using the index, refer topage 234.

6 Notes

At a glance12 Cockpit16 iDrive24 Voice activation system27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Controls32 Opening and closing48 Adjusting58 Transporting children safely62 Driving74 Displays90 Lamps95 Safety115 Driving stability control systems120 Driving comfort142 Climate control149 Interior equipment159 Storage compartments

Driving tips168 Things to remember when driving171 Loading174 Saving fuel

Mobility184 Refueling186 Fuel191 Wheels and tires199 Engine compartment201 Engine oil204 Coolant205 Maintenance207 Replacing components219 Breakdown assistance225 Care

Reference232 Technical data234 Everything from A to Z


NotesUsing this Owner's ManualOrientationThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic is by using the index.An initial overview of the vehicle is provided inthe first chapter.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineAny updates made after the editorial deadlinefor the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐pendix of the printed quick reference for thevehicle.

User's manual for Navigation,Entertainment, CommunicationThe topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐munication and the short commands of thevoice activation system are described in a sep‐arate user's manual, which is also includedwith the onboard literature.

Additional sources of informationThe service center will be happy to answer anyother questions you may have.Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, isavailable on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility ofpersonal injury and serious damage to thevehicle.◄ Marks the end of a specific item ofinformation."..." Identifies Control Display texts used toselect individual functions.

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voiceactivation system.››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by thevoice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken tohelp protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the

relevant section of this Owner's Manual forinformation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipmentThis Owner's Manual describes all models andall standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series.Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipmentis also described and illustrated that is notavailable in your vehicle, e.g., because of theselected optional equipment or the country-specific variants.This also applies for safety-related functionsand systems.For any options and equipment not describedin this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐mentary Owner's Handbooks.On right-hand drive vehicles, some control ele‐ments are arranged differently than shown inthe illustrations.

Status of the Owner'sManualBasic informationThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues apolicy of constant development that is con‐ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue toembody the highest quality and safety stan‐

Seite 6

Notes

6Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 925 793 - II/14

dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ fromthose in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineAny updates made after the editorial deadlinefor the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐pendix of the printed quick reference for thevehicle.

For your own safetyWarrantyYour vehicle is technically configured for theoperating conditions and registration require‐ments applying in the country of first delivery -homologation. If your vehicle is to be operatedin a different country it might be necessary toadapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ating conditions and permit requirements. Ifyour vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐gation requirements in a certain country youcannot lodge warranty claims for your vehiclethere. Further information can be obtainedfrom your Service Centre.

Maintenance and repairsAdvanced technology, e.g., the use of modernmaterials and high-performance electronics,requires suitable maintenance and repairmethods.Therefore, have this work performed only by aBMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ately trained personnel.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.

Parts and accessoriesBMW recommends using parts and accesso‐ries approved by BMW for this purpose.

Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐ucts approved by BMW and related qualifiedadvice.BMW has tested these products for safety andsuitability in relation to BMW vehicles.BMW can assume responsibility for them.However, we cannot assume any responsibilitywhatsoever for parts and accessories that havenot been specifically approved by BMW.BMW cannot evaluate whether each individualproduct from another manufacturer can beused with BMW vehicles without presenting asafety hazard. This guarantee is also not appli‐cable when country-specific government ap‐proval has been granted. Testing of this kindmay fail to embrace the entire range of poten‐tial operating conditions to which componentsmight be exposed on BMW vehicles. Suchproducts could conceivably fail to comply withBMW's own stringent quality standards.

California Proposition 65 WarningCalifornia laws require us to state the followingwarning:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐bile components and parts, including compo‐nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐cle, contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birthdefects and reproductive harm. In addition,certain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain or emitchemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that have causedcancer in laboratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing thoroughly with soap andwater.

Seite 7

Notes


Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publicationthoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐lowing warranties:▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐

ranty.▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐

ited Warranty.Detailed information about these warranties islisted in the Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models or in the Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models.Your vehicle has been specifically adapted anddesigned to meet the particular operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements in yourcountry and continental region in order to de‐liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicleis operated under those conditions. If you wishto operate your vehicle in another country orregion, you may be required to adapt your ve‐hicle to meet different prevailing operatingconditions and homologation requirements.You should also be aware of any applicablewarranty limitations or exclusions for suchcountry or region. In such case, please contactCustomer Relations for further information.

MaintenanceMaintain the vehicle regularly to sustain theroad safety, operational reliability and the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ures:▷ BMW Maintenance system▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian modelsIf the vehicle is not maintained according tothese specifications, this could result in seri‐

ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage isnot covered by the BMW New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Data memoryMany electronic components on your vehicleare equipped with data memories that tempo‐rarily or permanently store technical informa‐tion about the condition of the vehicle, eventsand faults. This technical information generallydocuments the state of a component, a mod‐ule, a system or the environment:▷ Operating states of system components,

fill levels for instance.▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from

its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration,transverse acceleration.

▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.

▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐gagement of stability control systems.

▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.This data is purely technical in nature and isused to detect and correct faults and to opti‐mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles overroutes traveled cannot be created from thisdata. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐pair services, service processes, warrantyclaims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐mation can be read out from the event andfault memories by the service personnel, in‐cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐nostic tools. You can obtain further informationthere if it is needed. After a fault is corrected,the information in the fault memory is deletedor overwritten on a continuous basis.When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐ciate this technical data with individuals if it iscombined with other information, e.g., an acci‐dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐

Seite 8

Notes


ness accounts — possibly with the assistanceof an expert.Additional functions that are contractuallyagreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicledata to be transmitted from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDRThis vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐tions, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for ashort period of time, typically 30 seconds orless.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:▷ How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened.▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal.▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under‐standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if anontrivial crash situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data, e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ment, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinely ac‐quired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi‐cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐

hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Reporting safety defectsFor US customersThe following only applies to vehicles ownedand operated in the US.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause in‐jury or death, you should immediately informthe National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW ofNorth America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone1-800-831-1117.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer,or BMW of North America, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐formation about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephonethe toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You canalso obtain other information about motor vehi‐cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 9

Notes


At a glanceThese overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with yourvehicle. You will also become quickly acquaintedwith the available control concepts and options.


CockpitVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐

ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Rear window safety switch 452 Power windows 443 Exterior mirror operation 554 Glove compartment on the driver's

side 159Driver assistance systems

Active Blind Spot Detec‐tion 112

Intelligent Safety 103

Lane departure warning 111

5 LampsFront fog lamps 93

Parking lamps 90

Low beams 90

Seite 12

At a glance Cockpit


Automatic headlamp con‐trol 91Daytime running lights 91Adaptive Light Control 91High-beam Assistant 92Instrument lighting 93

6 Steering column stalk, leftTurn signal 66

High beams, head‐lamp flasher 66

High-beam Assistant 92

Roadside parking lamps 91

Computer 84

7 Steering wheel buttons, leftStore speed 126, 120

Resume speed 128, 120

Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ing 127

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐terrupting 120

Reduce distance 123

Increase distance 123

Cruise control rocker switch 128, 122

8 Instrument cluster 749 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation 24

Telephone, see user's manual forNavigation, Entertainment andCommunication

Thumbwheel for selection lists 84

10 Steering column stalk, rightWindshield wipers 67

Rain sensor 68

Clean the windshields and head‐lamps 69

Rear window wiper 69

11 Start/stop the engine and switchthe ignition on/off 63

Auto Start/Stop function 64

12 Horn13 Steering wheel heating 57

14 Adjust steering wheel 5715 Open the tailgate 37

Seite 13

Cockpit At a glance


16 Unlock hood 200

All around the center console

1 Headliner 152 Control Display 163 Ventilation 1474 Hazard warning system 219

Central locking system 37

5 Glove compartment 1596 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual

for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐nication

7 Climate control 1428 Controller with buttons 16

9 Parking brake 6610 PDC Park Distance Control 129

Rearview camera 131Parking assistant 137Surround View 131

11 Driving Dynamics Control 117

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐trol 115

12 Automatic transmission selectorlever 70Manual transmission selector lever 70

Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit


All around the headliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐quest 219

2 Panoramic glass sunroof 45

3 Indicator lamp, front passengerairbag 97

4 Reading lamps 93

5 Interior lamps 93

Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance


iDriveVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

The conceptThe iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐tude of switches. Thus, these functions can beoperated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a tripTo avoid becoming distracted and pos‐

ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle'soccupants and to other road users, never at‐tempt to use the controls or enter informationunless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀

Controls at a glanceControl elements

1 Control Display2 Controller with buttons and, depending on

the equipment version, with touchpad

Control Display

Hints▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the

care instructions.▷ Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display canbe damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button.2. "Switch off control display"

Switching onPress the controller again to switch the screenback on.

Controller with navigation systemThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The controller can be used to selectmenu items and create the settings.Some iDrive functions can be operated usingthe touchpad on the controller.

Seite 16

At a glance iDrive


1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on controller

Press the but‐ton

Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimediamenu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

Press the but‐ton

Function

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation systemThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The controller can be used to selectmenu items and create the settings.1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in two directions.

Seite 17

iDrive At a glance


Buttons on controller

Press the but‐ton

Function

MENU Open the main menu.

Audio Open audio menu last lis‐tened to, switch between au‐dio menus.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating conceptOpening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.All iDrive functions can be called up via themain menu.

Selecting menu itemsHighlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menuitem is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's ManualIn the Owner's Manual, menu items that can beselected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,"Settings".

Changing between panelsAfter a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", anew panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.▷ Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previ‐ous panel is displayed.The previous panel is opened again bypressing the BACK button. In this case, thecurrent panel is not closed.

▷ Move the controller to the right.A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐ous display.

Seite 18

At a glance iDrive


White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐cate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menuWhen a menu is opened, it generally openswith the panel that was last selected in thatmenu. To display the first panel of a menu:▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed.▷ Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menuPress the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to theright repeatedly until the "Options" menu isdisplayed.

Options menuThe "Options" menu consists of various areas:▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".

This area remains unchanged.▷ Control options for the selected main

menu, e.g., for "Radio".▷ If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings1. Select a field.

2. Turn the controller until the desired settingis displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functionsSeveral menu items are preceded by a check‐box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu itemactivates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

TouchpadSome iDrive functions can be operated usingthe touchpad on the controller:

Selecting functions1. "Settings"2. "Touchpad"3. Select the desired function.

▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.▷ "Interactive map": operating the inter‐

active map.▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.▷ "Audio feedback": the entered letters

and numbers are announced.

Entering letters and numbersThe entry of the letters requires some practiceat the beginning. In the entry, pay attention tothe following:

Seite 19

iDrive At a glance


▷ For the input of upper/lower case lettersand numbers, it may be necessary toswitch via the controller to the correspond‐ing Input mode, refer to page 23, e.g.when the spelling of upper and lower caseletters is identical.

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed onthe Control Display.

▷ Always enter accompanying signs, such asaccents or periods so that the letter can beclearly recognized. The possibility of inputdepends on the set language. Where nec‐essary, enter special characters via thecontroller.

▷ To delete a character, slide to the left onthe touchpad.

▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right inthe center of the touchpad.

▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in theupper area of the touchpad.

▷ To enter an underscore, slide to the right inthe lower area of the touchpad.

Using interactive map and InternetThe interactive map in the navigation systemand Internet sites can be moved via the touch‐pad.

Function Controls

Move interactive mapor Internet sites.

Slide in the corre‐sponding direction.

Enlarge/shrink interac‐tive map or Internetsites.

Drag inwards oroutwards on thetouchpad with thefingers.

Display the menu oropen a link in the Inter‐net.

Tap once.

Changing settingsSettings on the control display, such as thevolume, can be made via the touchpad. To dothis slide to the left or right accordingly.

Example: setting the clockSetting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu isdisplayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the leftto display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" ishighlighted, and then press the controller.

Seite 20

At a glance iDrive


5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours andpress the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes andpress the controller.

Status informationStatus fieldThe following information is displayed in thestatus field at the top right:▷ Time.▷ Current entertainment source.▷ Sound output, on/off.▷ Wireless network reception strength.▷ Telephone status.▷ Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbolsThe symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

HD radio station is being received.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network receptionstrength.Symbol flashes: network search.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Text message was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter the PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player.

Music collection.

Gracenote® database.

AUX-IN port.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are switchedoff.

Seite 21

iDrive At a glance


Split screenGeneral informationAdditional information can be displayed on theright side of the split screen, e.g., informationfrom the onboard computer.In the divided screen view, the so-called splitscreen, this information remains visible evenwhen you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button.2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

1. Press the button.2. "Split screen"3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected.4. Press the controller or select "Split screen

content".5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memorybuttonsGeneral informationThe iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐grammable memory buttons and called up di‐rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐

tions, phone numbers and entry points into themenu.The settings are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Without navigation system andtelephoneOnly radio stations can be stored on the but‐tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐tertainment, Communication.

Saving a function1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for morethan 2 seconds.

Running a functionPress the button.The function will run immediately. This

means, for example, that the number is dialedwhen a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignmentUse a finger to touch the buttons. Do not weargloves or use objects.The key assignment is displayed at the topedge of the screen.

▷ To display short information: touch thebutton.

▷ To display detailed information: touch thebutton for an extended period.

Seite 22

At a glance iDrive


Deleting the button assignments1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for

approx. five seconds.2. "OK"

Entering letters and numbersGeneral information1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐

bers.2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed.3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the let‐ter or number.

Press the controller for an extendedperiod: delete all letters or numbers.

Switching between cases, letters andnumbersDepending on the menu, you can switch be‐tween entering upper and lower case, lettersand numbers:

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Move the controller up.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparisonEntry of names and addresses: the selection isnarrowed down every time a letter is enteredand letters may be added automatically.

The entries are continuously compared to thedata stored in the vehicle.▷ Only those letters are offered during the

entry for which data is available.▷ Destination search: town/city names can

be entered using the spelling of languageavailable on the Control Display.

Seite 23

iDrive At a glance


Voice activation systemVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

The concept▷ Most functions that are displayed on the

Control Display can be operated by spokencommands via the voice activation system.The system prompts you to make your en‐tries.

▷ Functions that can only be used when thevehicle is stationary cannot be operatedusing the voice activation system.

▷ The system uses a special microphone onthe driver's side.

▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner'sManual to use with the voice activationsystem.

RequirementsVia the Control Display, set a language that isalso supported by the voice activation systemso that the spoken commands can be identi‐fied.Set the language, refer to page 87.

Using voice activationActivating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Wait for the signal.3. Say the command.

The command is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐cates that the voice activation system is active.If no other commands are available, operatethe function in this case via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activationsystem

Briefly press the button on the steer‐ing wheel or ›End‹.

Possible commandsMost menu items on the Control Display canbe voiced as commands.The available commands depend on whichmenu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐play.Short commands exist for many functions.Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, canalso be selected via the voice activation sys‐tem. Speak these list entries exactly as theyare displayed in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloudYou can have the available commands read outloud for you: ›commands‹For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐played, the commands for the settings areread out loud.

Seite 24

At a glance Voice activation system


Executing functions using shortcommandsFunctions on the main menu can be performeddirectly by means of short commands, nearlyirrespective of which menu item is currentlyselected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.List of short commands of the voice activationsystem, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐munication Owner's Manual.

Help dialog for the voice activationsystemCalling up help dialog: ›Help‹Additional commands for the help dialog:▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the

current operating options and the most im‐portant commands for them are an‐nounced.

▷ ›Help voice activation‹: information aboutthe principle of operation for the voice acti‐vation system is announced.

One example: open the tonesettingsVia the main menuThe commands of the menu items are spokenjust as they are selected via the controller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound outputif necessary.


3. ›Radio menu‹4. ›Audio settings‹

Via short commandThe desired radio station can also be startedvia a short command.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound outputif necessary.


3. ›Audio settings‹

Setting the voice dialogYou can set whether the system should usethe standard dialog or a shorter version.In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, theannouncements from the system are issued inan abbreviated form.

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Speech type:"4. Select the setting.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the volume button while giving an in‐struction until the desired volume is set.▷ The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed.▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐

trol currently in use.

Hints on EmergencyRequestsDo not use the voice activation system to ini‐tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.

Seite 25

Voice activation system At a glance


This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ment of a telephone connection.Instead, use the SOS button, refer topage 219, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐sis, and speed.

▷ Always say commands in the language ofthe voice activation system.

▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐roof closed to prevent noise interference.

▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehiclewhile speaking.

Seite 26

At a glance Voice activation system


Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicleVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Integrated Owner's Manualin the vehicleThe Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐played on the Control Display. The equipmentand functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐bed therein.

Components of the IntegratedOwner's ManualThe Integrated Owner's Manual consists ofthree parts, which offer various levels of infor‐mation or access possibilities.

Quick Reference GuideLocated in the Quick Reference is importantinformation for the operation of the vehicle, theoperation of basic vehicle functions or for whatto do in the event of a flat tire. This informationcan also be displayed during driving.

Search by picturesInformation and descriptions based on illustra‐tions can be searched via search by pictures.This is helpful, for example, if the description ofan outfitting package that cannot be named isneeded.

Owner's ManualInformation and descriptions can be searchedby direct entry of a search term via the index.

Select components

1. Press the button.2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".3. Press the controller.4. Selecting desired range:

▷ "Quick reference"▷ "Search by pictures"▷ "Owner's Manual"

Leafing through the Owner's Manual

Page by page with link accessTurn the controller until the next or previouspage is displayed.

Page by page without link accessLeaf through the pages directly while skippingthe links.Highlight the symbol once. Now simply pressthe controller to leaf from page to page.

Leaf back.

Leaf forward.

Seite 27

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance


Context help - Owner's Manual to thetemporarily selected functionThe relevant information can be opened di‐rectly.

Opening via the iDriveTo move directly from the application on theControl Display to the options menu:

1. Press the button or move the control‐ler to the right repeatedly until the"Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Controlmessage is displayedDirectly from the Check Control message onthe Control Display:"Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and theOwner's ManualTo change from a function, e.g., radio, to theOwner's Manual on the Control Display and toswitch between the two displays:

1. Press the button or move the control‐ler to the right repeatedly until the"Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4. Press the button again to return tothe function displayed last.

5. Press the button to return to the pageof the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To switch back and forth repeatedly betweenthe function displayed last and the page of theOwner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4and 5. This opens a new panel every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General informationThe Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐grammable memory buttons and called up di‐rectly.

Storing1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for morethan 2 seconds.

ExecutingPress the button.The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐

mediately.

Seite 28

At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle


Seite 29

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance


ControlsThis chapter is intended to provide you with

information that will give you complete control ofyour vehicle. All features and accessories thatare useful for driving and your safety, comfort

and convenience are described here.


Opening and closingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Remote control/keyGeneral informationThe vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐trols with integrated keys.Every remote control contains a replaceablebattery.Depending on the equipment package andcountry-specific variant, the functions of thekeys can be set. Settings, refer to page 41.For every remote control, personal settings arestored in the vehicle. Personal Profile, refer topage 33.Information on the required maintenance isstored in the remote controls. Service data inthe remote control, refer to page 205.

At a glance

1 Unlocking2 Locking

3 Unlock the tailgate4 Panic mode in alarm system

Integrated key

Press the button on the back of the remotecontrol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.The integrated key fits the following locks:▷ Driver's door.▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger

side.

Replacing the battery

1. Take the integrated key out of the remotecontrol.

2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐

ment, arrow 2.4. Insert a battery of the same type with the

positive side facing upwards.5. Press the cover closed.

Seite 32

Controls Opening and closing


Take the used battery to a recyclingcenter or to your service center.

New remote controlsNew remote controls are available from theservice center.

Loss of the remote controlsLost remote controls can be blocked by yourservice center.

Emergency detection of remotecontrolIt is possible to switch on the ignition or startthe engine in situations such as the following:▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐

mote control by external sources, e.g. byradio masts.

▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐

bile devices in close proximity to the re‐mote control.

▷ Interference of radio transmission bycharger while charging items such as mo‐bile devices in the vehicle.

A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐tempt is made to switch on the ignition or startthe engine.

Starting the engine with emergencydetection of the remote control

Automatic transmission: if a correspondingCheck Control message appears, hold the re‐mote control, as shown, against the marked

area on the steering column and press theStart/Stop button within 10 seconds whilepressing the brake.Manual transmission: if a corresponding CheckControl message appears, hold the remotecontrol, as shown, against the marked area onthe steering column and press the Start/Stopbutton within 10 seconds while pressing theclutch pedal.

Personal ProfileThe conceptIndividual settings in the vehicle are saved inpersonal profiles. Every remote control is as‐signed a profile.Three personal profiles and a guest profile canbe created.▷ Changes to the settings are automatically

saved in the profile currently activated.▷ During unlocking, the profile stored for the

remote control is activated.▷ Your personal settings will be recognized

and called up again even if the vehicle hasbeen operated in the meantime with an‐other remote control.

AdjustingThe following settings are stored in a profile.▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to

last.▷ Assignment of the programmable memory

buttons.▷ Tone settings.▷ Audio source listened to last.▷ Unlocking the vehicle: driver door or entire

vehicle.▷ Locking the vehicle: if no door is open or

after starting off.▷ Welcome lamps: on/off.

Seite 33

Opening and closing Controls


▷ Triple turn signal activation: on/off.▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐

ting.▷ Language on the Control Display.▷ Daytime running lights: on/off.▷ Automatic climate control/Automatic cli‐

mate control with enhanced features: set‐tings.

▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voiceoutput on/off.

▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting thesignal tone volume.

▷ Rearview camera: selection of functionsand type of display.

▷ Side view: display type.▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness,

position and rotation of the display.▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program.▷ Exterior mirror position.▷ Driver's seat position: automatically re‐

trieved after unlocking.▷ Collision warning: warning time.▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/

off.▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting,

on/off.

Profile management

Opening the profilesA different profile can be called up than theone associated with the remote control cur‐rently in use.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Select a profile.Called up profile is assigned to the remotecontrol being used at the time.

Renaming profiles1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Open "Options".4. "Rename current profile"

Resetting profilesThe settings of the active profile are reset totheir default values.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Open "Options".4. "Reset current profile"

Exporting profilesMost settings of the active profile and thesaved contacts can be exported.This can be helpful for securing and retrievingpersonal settings, before delivering the vehicleto a workshop for example. The saved profilescan be taken with you to another vehicleequipped with the Personal Profile function.The following export options are available:▷ BMW Online.▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.

Popular file systems for USB devices aresupported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐ommended formats for profile export.Other formats may not support the export.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Export profile"4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface: "USB device"

Seite 34



Importing profilesExisting settings and contacts are overwrittenwith the imported profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Import profile"4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface: "USB device"

Using the guest profileThe guest profile can be used to make individ‐ual settings that are saved in none of the threepersonal profiles.This can be useful for drivers who are usingthe vehicle temporarily and do not have theirown profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Open "Guest".The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is notassigned to the current remote control.

Display profile list during startThe profile list can be displayed during eachstart for selecting the desired profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Open "Options".4. "Display user list at startup"

Using the remote controlNote

Take the remote control with youPeople or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐side. Always take the remote control with youwhen leaving the vehicle so that the vehiclecan then be opened from the outside.◀

UnlockingPress the button on the remote con‐trol.

The vehicle is unlocked.Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesylamps are switched on.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.Performing settings, refer to page 41.The alarm system, refer to page 42, is dis‐armed.

Convenient openingThe remote control can be used to open thewindows and the glass sunroof after unlocking.

Press and hold the button on the re‐mote control.

Releasing the button stops the motion.

LockingPress the button on the remote control.

Locking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannotbe unlocked from inside without special knowl‐edge.◀

The alarm system, refer to page 42, is armed.

Switching on interior lamps andcourtesy lamps

Press the button on the remote controlwith the vehicle locked.

If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐onds of the vehicle being locked, the interiormotion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft warning system, refer to page 43, areswitched off. After locking, wait 10 secondsbefore pressing the button again.

Seite 35



Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote con‐trol for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Opening the tailgatePress the button on the remote con‐trol for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate opens automatically, regardless ofwhether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

Note the opening height of the tailgateThe tailgate pivots back and up when it

opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearancewhen the tailgate opens; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped andthe country-specific variant, you can setwhether the doors are also unlocked.

Do not place the remote control in thecargo area

Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe tailgate is closed.◀

Provide edge protectionSharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heatingwires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐tion.◀

MalfunctionIf the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐locked with the remote control, the batterymay be discharged or there may be interfer‐ence from external sources such as mobilephones, metal objects, overhead power lines,transmission towers, etc.

In this case, lock/unlock the vehicle without theremote control, refer to page 36.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is gov‐erned by the following:FCC ID:▷ LX8766S.▷ LX8766E.▷ LX8CAS.▷ LX8CAS2.▷ MYTCAS4.Compliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐

ference, and▷ this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

Without remote controlFrom the outside

Locking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannotbe unlocked from inside without special knowl‐edge.◀

Remove the key before pulling the doorhandle

Before pulling the outside door handle, removethe key to avoid damaging the paintwork andthe key.◀

Seite 36



Unlock or lock the driver's door via the doorlock using the integrated key. The other doorsmust be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm systemThe alarm system is not armed if the vehicle islocked with the integrated key.The alarm system is triggered when the door isopened, if the vehicle was unlocked via thedoor lock. In order to terminate this alarm, un‐lock vehicle with the remote control or switchon the ignition, if necessary, by emergency de‐tection of the remote control.

From the inside

Locking and unlocking

Pressing the button for the central locking sys‐tem locks and unlocks the tailgate and the rearwindow when the front doors are closed, butthey are not secured against theft.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.In the event of an accident of correspondingseverity, the vehicle is automatically unlocked.

The hazard warning system and interior lampscome on.

Unlocking and opening

▷ Either unlock the doors together using thebutton for the central locking system andthen pull the door handle above the arm‐rest or

▷ Pull the door opener twice individually oneach door: the first time unlocks the door,the second time opens it.

TailgateAutomatic tailgate operation

Adjusting the opening heightYou can set how far the tailgate should open.

Adjusting the opening heightWhen adjusting the opening height, en‐

sure that there is a clearance of at least4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, theceiling may not be high enough for the opentailgate if the load situation changes.◀

1. "Settings"2. "Tailgate"3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐

ing height is selected.

OpeningThe tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that adequate clearance is availablebefore opening.

Seite 37



Note the opening height of the tailgateThe tailgate pivots back and up when it

opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearancewhen the tailgate opens; otherwise, damagemay result.Adjust the opening height of the tailgate ac‐cording to the given situation.◀

The tailgate opens automatically to the ad‐justed opening height.

▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐gate.

▷ Press the button on the remotecontrol for approx. 1 second.

▷ Push the button in the driver'sfootwell.

The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is sta‐tionary, provided that the tailgate has notbeen locked.

Pressing the button again stops the motion.The opening process is interrupted as well:▷ When starting the engine.▷ When the vehicle starts moving.▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐

well.▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the

tailgate.Provide edge protectionSharp or angular objects can hit the rear


ClosingWithout Comfort Access:

▷ Press the button on the inside of the tail‐gate.The tailgate closes automatically.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

With Comfort Access:

▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside ofthe tailgate.The tailgate closes automatically.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

▷ Press the button, arrow 2.Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi‐cle is locked.

Seite 38



▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐gate.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

The closing operation is interrupted:▷ When starting the engine.▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.

Keep the closing path clearMake sure that the closing path of the

tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐sult.◀



Manual operationIn the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slowand smooth motion.

Do not operate the tailgate manually if itis blocked

If the tailgate is blocked, do not operate it man‐ually as the tailgate may otherwise becomedamaged and injury may result.Contact your service center.◀

Opening and closing the rear windowSmall objects can be loaded and unloadedquickly by opening the rear window separately.

Press the button next to the rear window.The rear window opens slightly and can beswung upward.To close, press the window closed.

Provide edge protectionSharp or angular objects can hit the rear


Comfort AccessThe conceptThe vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ing the remote control.All you need to do is to have the remote con‐trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.The vehicle automatically detects the remotecontrol when it is nearby or in the passengercompartment.Comfort Access supports the following func‐tions:▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.▷ Convenient closing.▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.▷ Start the engine.

Functional requirements▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐

ence nearby.

Seite 39



▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote controlmust be located outside of the vehicle.

▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is notpossible until after approx. 2 seconds.

▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐mote control is in the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remotecontrolThe functions can be controlled by pressingthe buttons of the remote control or ComfortAccess.

Unlocking

Grasp the door handle on the driver's or frontpassenger door completely, arrow.This corresponds to pressing the buttonon the remote control.

Locking

Press the area on the door handle, arrow, withyour finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐ing the door handle.This corresponds to pressing the buttonon the remote control.

To save battery power, ensure that the ignitionand all electronic systems and/or power con‐sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐hicle.

Convenient closingPress the area on the door handle, arrow, withyour finger and hold it down.In addition to locking, the windows and theglass sunroof are closed.

Monitor the closing processMonitor the closing process to ensure

that no one becomes trapped.◀

Unlocking the tailgate separatelyPress the button on the exterior of the tailgate.This corresponds to pressing the but‐ton on the remote control.



Opening tailgate with no-touchactivationWith Comfort Access and automatic tailgateoperation, the tailgate can be opened with no-contact activation using the remote controlyou are carrying.Two sensors detect a forward-directed footmotion in the center of the area at the rear ofthe car and the tailgate opens.

Seite 40



Foot movement to be carried outDo not touch vehicleWith the foot motion, make sure there is

steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. fromhot exhaust system parts.◀

1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.

2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as farunder the vehicle as possible and immedi‐ately pull it back. With this movement, theleg must pass through the ranges of bothsensors.

OpeningThe tailgate opens, regardless of whether itwas previously locked or unlocked.The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.Ensure that adequate clearance is availablebefore opening.Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐tem flashes.

Preventing inadvertent openingIn situations where the tailgate should

not be opened with no-touch activation, en‐sure that the remote control is located beyondthe range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 mfrom the rear of the car.Otherwise, the tailgate may be opened inad‐vertently, for example by an unintentional ormisinterpreted movement of the foot.◀

MalfunctionComfort Access may not function properly if itexperiences interference from external sour‐ces such as mobile phones, metal objects,overhead power lines, transmission towers,etc.In this case, open or close the vehicle using thebuttons on the remote control or use theintegrated key in the door lock.If there is a malfunction, open the tailgate withthe remote control button or with the button onthe tailgate.

AdjustingUnlockingThe setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:"4. Select the desired function:

▷ "Driver's door only"Only the driver's door and the fuel fillerflap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐locks the entire vehicle.

▷ "All doors"The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped orthe country-specific variant, you can setwhether the doors are also unlocked with the

button on the remote control.

Confirmation signals from the vehicleThe setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐

mation signals.

Seite 41



▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"

Automatic lockingThe setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the desired function:

▷ "Lock if no door is opened"The vehicle locks automatically after ashort period of time if a door is notopened.

▷ "Lock after start driving"The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive away.

Retrieving the seat and mirror settingsThe driver's seat and exterior mirror positionsused last are stored for the remote control cur‐rently in use.When the vehicle is unlocked, these positionsare automatically retrieved if this function wasactivated.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seatIf this function is used, first make sure

that the footwell behind the driver's seat isempty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀

The adjustment procedure is interrupted:▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐

ory is pressed.

Activating the setting1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. "Last seat position autom."

Alarm systemThe conceptThe vehicle alarm system responds to:▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate

or rear window.▷ Movements in the vehicle.▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐

tempts to steal a wheel or when towing thecar.

▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐

tem.▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.

Arming and disarming the alarmsystem

General informationWhen you lock or unlock the vehicle, eitherwith the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐cess at the door lock, the alarm system isarmed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm systemThe alarm system is triggered when the door isopened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the doorlock.In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehiclewith the remote control or switch on the igni‐tion, if necessary, by emergency detection ofthe remote control.

Tailgate and armed alarm systemThe tailgate can be opened even when thealarm system is armed.After the tailgate is closed, it is locked andmonitored again if the doors are locked. Thehazard warning system flashes once.

Seite 42



Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote con‐trol for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching off the alarmTo terminate the alarm:▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐

trol.▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying

the remote control with you, grasp thedriver side or front passenger side doorhandle completely.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearviewmirror

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every2 seconds:The system is armed.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:The doors, hood, tailgate or rear window isnot closed properly, but the rest of the ve‐hicle is secured.After 10 seconds, the indicator lampflashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.

▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ing:The vehicle has not been tampered with.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlockinguntil the engine ignition is switched on, butno longer than approx. 5 minutes:An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.The alarm system responds in situations suchas attempts to steal a wheel or when the car istowed.

Interior motion sensorThe windows and glass sunroof must beclosed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarmsThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐sor can be switched off together, such as inthe following situations:▷ In automatic car washes.▷ In duplex garages.▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer.▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

Press the remote control button againwithin 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle

is locked.The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐onds and then continues to flash.The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐sor are switched off until the vehicle is lockedagain.

Seite 43



Power windowsGeneral information

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐jure themselves.◀

Opening

▷ Press the switch to the resistancepoint.The window opens while the switch is held.

▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ance point.The window opens automatically.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.Convenient opening, refer to page 35, via theremote control.

ClosingKeep the closing path clearMonitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window isclear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

▷ Pull the switch to the resistancepoint.The window closes while the switch isheld.

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistancepoint.The window closes automatically.Pressing the switch stops the motion.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 39.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force exceeds a specific value asa window closes, the closing action is inter‐rupted.The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐tection

Even with the pinch protection system, checkthat the window's closing path is clear; other‐wise, the closing action may not stop in certainsituations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

No window accessoriesDo not install any accessories in the

range of movement of the windows; otherwise,the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀

Closing without the pinch protectionsystem

Keep the closing path clearMonitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window isclear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

For example, if there is an external danger or ifice on the windows prevents a window fromclosing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance pointand hold it there.The pinch protection is limited and thewindow reopens slightly if the closing forceexceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance pointagain within approx. 4 seconds and hold itthere.

Seite 44



The window closes without pinch protec‐tion.

Safety switchThe safety switch in the driver's door can beused to prevent children, for example, fromopening and closing the rear windows usingthe switches in the rear.

Switching on and offPress the button.The LED lights up if the safety func‐

tion is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operationPress the safety switch when transport‐

ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury mayresult if the windows are closed without super‐vision.◀

Roller sunblindsRoller sunblinds for the rear sidewindowsPull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hookit onto the bracket.

Do not open the window while the rollersunblind is raised.

Do not open the window while the roller sun‐blind is raised; otherwise, there is a risk ofdamage at high speeds that may result in per‐sonal injury.◀

Panoramic glass sunroofGeneral informationThe glass sunroof and the sliding visor can beoperated together or separately, using thesame switch.The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐tion is switched on.


sure that the closing path of the glass sunroofis clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀


leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐selves.◀

Tilting the glass sunroofPush switch upward briefly.▷ The closed roof is tilted and

the sliding visor opensslightly.

▷ The opened roof closes untilit is in its tilted position. Thesliding visor stays com‐pletely open.

Opening/closing the sliding visor▷ Press the switch in the de‐

sired direction to the resist‐ance point and hold it there.The sliding visor moveswhile the switch is beingheld.

▷ Press the switch in the desired directionpast the resistance point.The sliding visor moves automatically.Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐tion.

Seite 45



Opening/closing the glass sunroofWhen the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐scribed under Sliding visor.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof andsliding visor together

Briefly press the switch twice insuccession in the desired direc‐tion past the resistance point.The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐sor move together. Pressing the

switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening, refer to page 35, via theremote control.Convenient closing, refer to page 40, withComfort Access.

Comfort positionStops the roof in the comfort position if theroof is not fully open. This reduces wind noisein the passenger compartment.If desired, continue the movement by pressingthe switch.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force when closing the glass sun‐roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ment is stopped, beginning at approximatelythe middle of the opening in the roof, or fromthe tilted position during closing.The glass sunroof opens again slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐tection

Despite the pinch protection system, checkthat the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise,the closing action may not be interrupted incertain extreme situations, such as when thinobjects are present.◀

Closing from the open positionwithout pinch protectionFor example, if there is an external danger, pro‐ceed as follows:

1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐sistance point and hold.Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐opens slightly if the closing force exceedsa certain value.

2. Press the switch forward again beyond theresistance point and hold until the roofcloses without pinch protection. Make surethat the closing area is clear.

Closing from the raised positionwithout pinch protectionIf there is an external danger, push the switchforward past the resistance point and hold it.The roof closes without pinch protection.

Initializing after a power failureAfter a power failure during the opening orclosing process, the roof can only be operatedto a limited extent.

Initializing the systemThe system can be initialized when the vehicleis stationary and the engine is running.During the initialization, the roof closes withoutpinch protection.


sure that the closing path of the glass sunroofis clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Press the switch up and hold ituntil the initialization is com‐plete:▷ Initialization begins within

15 seconds and is com‐pleted when the sunroof andsliding visor are completelyclosed.

Seite 46



▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.

Seite 47



AdjustingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Sitting safelyThe ideal seating position can make a vitalcontribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.The seating position plays an important role inan accident in combination with:▷ Safety belts, refer to page 51.▷ Head restraints, refer to page 52.▷ Airbags, refer to page 95.

SeatsHints

Do not adjust the seat while drivingDo not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐

ing, or the seat could respond with unexpectedmovement and the ensuing loss of vehiclecontrol could lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to therear

Also on the front passenger side, do not inclinethe backrest on the front passenger side toofar to the rear during driving, or there is a risk ofslipping under the safety belt in the event of anaccident. This would eliminate the protectionnormally provided by the belt.◀

Manually adjustable seats

At a glance

1 Forward/backward2 Thigh support3 Seat tilt4 Backrest width5 Lumbar support6 Height7 Backrest tilt

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desireddirection.After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ward or back slightly to make sure it engagesproperly.

Seite 48

Controls Adjusting


Height

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seator lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever and apply your weight to thebackrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Seat tilt

Pull the lever and move the seat to the desiredtilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weightto the seat or lift it off to make sure the seatengages properly.

Electrically adjustable seats

At a glance

1 Seat and mirror memory2 Backrest width3 Lumbar support4 Backrest tilt5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

NoteThe seat setting for the driver's seat is storedfor the remote control currently in use. Whenthe vehicle is unlocked via the remote control,the position is automatically retrieved if thefunction, refer to page 42, is activated for thispurpose.

Adjustments in detail1. Forward/back.

Seite 49

Adjusting Controls


2. Height.

3. Seat tilt.

4. Backrest tilt.

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjustthe thigh support.

Lumbar supportThe curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐justed in such a way that it supports the lumbarregion of the spine. The lower back and thespine are supported for upright posture.

▷ Press the front/rear sectionof the switch.The curvature is increased/decreased.

▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐tion of the switch.The curvature is shifted up/down.

Backrest widthChange the width of the back‐rest using the side wings to ad‐just the lateral support.

Seite 50

Controls Adjusting


Front seat heating

Switching onPress the button once for each tem‐perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐cally with the temperature selected last.When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switching offPress the button longer.The LEDs go out.

Rear seat heating

Switching onPress the button once for each tem‐perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.

If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐cally with the temperature selected last.When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switching offPress the button longer.The LEDs go out.

Safety beltsSeats with safety beltThe vehicle has five seats, each of which isequipped with a safety belt.

Number of safety beltsYour vehicle has been fitted with five safetybelts for the safety of you and your passen‐gers. However, they can only offer protectionwhen adjusted correctly.

HintsAlways make sure that safety belts are beingworn by all occupants before driving away.To protect the occupants, the belt locking trig‐gers early. Slowly guide the belt out of theholder when applying it.Although airbags enhance safety by providingadded protection, they are not a substitute forsafety belts.▷ The upper shoulder strap's anchorage

point will be correct for adult seat occu‐pants of every build if the seat is correctlyadjusted.

▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐sengers sitting on the left and right.

▷ The center rear seat belt buckle is solelyintended for the center passenger.

Seite 51

Adjusting Controls


One person per safety beltNever allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants orsmall children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

Putting on the beltLay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to thebody as possible. Make sure that the belt lieslow around the hips in the lap area and doesnot press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the beltcan slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontalimpact and injure the abdomen.The safety belt must not lie across the neck,rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakableobjects, or be pinched.◀

Reduction of restraining effectAvoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull

the shoulder belt periodically to readjust thetension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed;otherwise, the belt can be damaged and therestraining effect reduced.◀

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage inthe belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt1. Hold the belt firmly.2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for driver's andpassenger's seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐nal sounds. Make sure that the safetybelts are positioned correctly. The

safety belt reminder is active at speeds aboveapprox. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activatedif objects are placed on the front passengerseat.

Damage to safety beltsIn the case of strain caused by accidents ordamage:Have the safety belts, including the safety belttensioners, replaced and have the belt anchorschecked.

Checking and replacing safety beltsHave the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensuredthat this safety feature will function properly.◀

Front headrestsCorrectly adjusted head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the eventof an accident.

Adjusting the head restraintCorrectly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐creased risk of injury in an accident.◀

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapproximately at ear level.

DistanceAdjust the distance so that the head restraintis as close as possible to the back of the head.If necessary, adjust the distance by adjustingthe tilt of the backrest.

Seite 52

Controls Adjusting


Adjusting the height

▷ To raise: pull.▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

TiltThree different tilt positions are available.

▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐straint forward, arrow 1.

▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The headrestraint folds as far back as possible.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no one will besitting in the seat in question.

1. Pull the head restraint upward as far aspossible.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull thehead restraint out completely.

Before transporting passengersReinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐able.◀

Rear head restraintsCorrectly adjusted head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the eventof an accident.

Adjusting the head restraintCorrectly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐creased risk of injury in an accident.◀

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapproximately at ear level.

Seite 53

Adjusting Controls


Adjusting the height

▷ To raise: pull.▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.The center head restraint cannot be adjustedin elevation.

Folding down head restraintsExtending/retracting head restraintOnly fold down head restraint if no pas‐

sengers are in the rear. Fold out retractedheadrests again if passengers are being car‐ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increasedrisk of injury in the event of an accident.◀

▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.

▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no one will besitting in the seat in question.

1. Pull the head restraint upward as far aspossible.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull thehead restraint out completely.

Before transporting passengersReinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐able.◀

Seat and mirror memoryHints

Do not retrieve the memory while drivingDo not retrieve the memory setting while

driving, as an unexpected movement of theseat could result in an accident.◀

Keep the movement area unobstructedWhen changing the seat position, keep

the seat's area of movement unobstructed;otherwise, people can be injured or objectsdamaged.◀

Seite 54

Controls Adjusting


General information

Two different driver's seat and exterior mirrorpositions can be stored and retrieved for eachremote control. Settings for the backrest widthand lumbar support are not stored in memory.

Storing1. Switch on the ignition.2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in thebutton lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LEDgoes out.

If the M button is pressed accidentally:Press the button again.The LED goes out.

Calling up settings

Comfort function1. Open the driver's door.2. Switch off the ignition.3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.The corresponding seat position is performedautomatically.The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Safety mode1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐

nition.

2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2until the adjustment procedure is com‐pleted.

Calling up of a seat positiondeactivatedAfter a brief period, the calling up of storedseat positions is deactivated to save batterypower.To reactivate calling up of a seat position:▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.▷ Press a button on the remote control.▷ Press the Start/Stop button.

MirrorsExterior mirrors

At a glance

1 Adjusting2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor3 Fold in and out

General informationThe mirror on the passenger side is morecurved than the driver's side mirror.

Estimating distances correctlyObjects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distanceto the traffic behind you based on what yousee in the mirror, as this will increase your riskof an accident.◀

Seite 55

Adjusting Controls


Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, themirror setting is stored for the remote controlin use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐mote control, the position is automatically re‐trieved if the setting for this function is active.

Selecting a mirrorTo change over to the other mirror:Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electricallyThe setting corresponds to the direc‐tion in which the button is pressed.

Saving positionsSeat and mirror memory, refer to page 54

Adjusting manuallyIf an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,press the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic Curb Monitor

The conceptWhen the reverse gear is engaged, the mirrorglass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐senger side. This improves your view of thecurb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐ing, for example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switchto the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

DeactivatingSlide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐senger side mirror position.

Fold in and outPress the button.

Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.For example, this is advantageous▷ In car washes.▷ In narrow streets.▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually.Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐matically at a speed of approx.25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car washBefore washing the car in an automatic

car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand orwith the button; otherwise, the mirrors couldbe damaged, depending on the width of thevehicle.◀

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are automatically heatedwhenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming featureBoth exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐terior rear view mirror, refer to page 57.

Seite 56

Controls Adjusting


Interior rearview mirror, manuallydimmable

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect bythe interior mirror.

Interior rearview mirror, automaticdimming feature

The concept

Photocells are used for control:▷ In the mirror glass.▷ On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirementFor proper operation:▷ Keep the photocells clean.▷ Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheelGeneral information

Do not adjust while drivingDo not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movementcould result in an accident.◀

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi‐tion.

3. Fold the lever back.

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/offPress the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 57

Adjusting Controls


Transporting children safelyVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

The right place for childrenNote

Children in the vehicleDo not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐selves and other persons, e.g., by opening thedoors.◀

Children should always be in the rearAccident research shows that the safest placefor children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rearOnly transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm inthe rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐vided in accordance with the age, weight andsize of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐creased risk of injury in an accident.Children 13 years of age or older must wear asafety belt as soon as a suitable child restraintfixing system can no longer be used, due totheir age, weight and size.◀

Children on the front passenger seatShould it ever be necessary to use a child re‐straint fixing system in the front passengerseat, make sure that the front, knee and sideairbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐

vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐ger airbags, refer to page 97.

NoteDeactivated front passenger airbagsIf a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passengerairbags must be deactivated; otherwise, thereis an increased risk of injury to the child whenthe airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐straint fixing system.◀

Installing child restraintfixing systemsBefore mountingBefore mounting child restraint fixing systems,ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked.

HintsManufacturer's information for child re‐straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixingsystems, observe the information provided bythe system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐tective effect can be impaired.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seatWhen installing child restraint fixing sys‐

tems, make sure that the child seat is securelyfastened to the backrest of the seat. The angleof the backrest may need to be adjusted and,where necessary, the headrest height may alsoneed to be adjusted, or if possible removed.Make sure that all backrests are securelylocked. Otherwise, the stability of the childseat is limited, and there is an increased risk ofinjury because of unexpected movement of therear seat backrest.◀

Seite 58

Controls Transporting children safely


On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbagsAfter installing a child restraint fixing system inthe front passenger seat, make sure that thefront, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐senger side are deactivated.Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐matically, refer to page 97.

Deactivating the front passenger airbagsIf a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passengerairbags must be deactivated; otherwise, thereis an increased risk of injury to the child whenthe airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐straint fixing system.◀

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint fixing system,move the front passenger seat as far back aspossible and adjust its height to the highestposition to obtain the best possible position forthe belt and to offer optimal protection in theevent of an accident.If the upper fixing point of the safety belt is lo‐cated before the belt guide of the child seat,move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐til the best possible belt guide position isreached.

Backrest widthAdjustable backrest width: before installing achild restraint fixing system in the front pas‐senger seat, open the backrest width com‐pletely. Do not change the backrest widthagain and do not call up a memory position.

Backrest width for the child seatBefore installing a child restraint fixing

system in the front passenger seat, the back‐rest width must be opened completely. Do notchange the adjustment after this; otherwise,the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passengersafety belt can be locked against pulling out formounting the child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.2. Secure the child restraint fixing system

with the belt.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixingsystem. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing systemLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐dren.

Seite 59

Transporting children safely Controls


NoteFollow manufacturer's information forLATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraintfixing systems, observe the operating andsafety information from the system manufac‐turer; otherwise, the level of protection may bereduced.◀

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchorsThe lower anchors may be used to attach theCRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined childand CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the childis restrained by the internal harnesses.

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors haveproperly engaged and that the child restraintfixing system is resting snugly against thebackrest; otherwise, the degree of protectionoffered may be reduced.◀

Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐ing system, pull the belt away from the childrestraint fixing system.

Position

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐cated behind the indicated covers.

Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixingsystems1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐

fer to the user's manual of the system.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with atether strap

Mounting points

There are three mounting points for the upperretaining strap of LATCH child restraint fixingsystems.

NoteMounting eyesOnly use the mounting eyes for the up‐

per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyescould be damaged.◀

Retaining strap guideRetaining strapMake sure that the upper retaining strap

is not routed over the head restraints or sharpedges and is free of twisting on its way to theupper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐not properly secure the child restraint fixingsystem in an accident.◀

Seite 60

Controls Transporting children safely


1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint.3 Hook for upper retaining strap4 Mounting point/eye5 Seat backrest6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe mounting point1. Raise the head restraint if necessary.2. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint.3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between

the backrest and the cargo cover.4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to

the mounting eye.5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.

Locking the doors andwindowsRear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.The door can now be opened from the outsideonly.

Safety switch for the rearPress the button on the driver's door ifchildren are being transported in the

rear.

This locks various functions so that they can‐not be operated from the rear: safety switch,refer to page 45.

Seite 61

Transporting children safely Controls


DrivingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Start/Stop buttonThe concept

Pressing the Start/Stop buttonswitches the ignition on or offand starts the engine.Automatic transmission: Theengine starts if the brake is de‐

pressed while pressing the Start/Stop button.Manual transmission: the engine starts if theclutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stopbutton is pressed.

Ignition onAutomatic transmission: Press the Start/Stopbutton but do not depress the brake.Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the clutchpedal at the same time.All vehicle systems are ready for operation.Most of the indicator and warning lamps in theinstrument cluster light up for varying lengthsof time.To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.

NoteIf the engine is switched off and the ignition isswitched on, the system automaticallyswitches to the radio ready state when thedoor is opened if the lights are switched off orthe daytime running lights are switched on.

Ignition offAutomatic transmission: Press the Start/Stopbutton again, but do not depress the brake.Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop button again, and do not press on theclutch pedal at the same time.All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster goout.To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.

P when the ignition is switched offP is engaged automatically when the ig‐

nition is switched off. When in an automatic carwash, for example, ensure that the ignition isnot switched off accidentally.◀

The ignition automatically cuts off while thevehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the

low beams are activated.▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still bestarted. This function is only availablewhen the low beams are switched off.

▷ When opening or closing the driver door, ifthe driver's seat belt is unbuckled and thelow beams are switched off.

▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, ifthe driver's door is open and the lowbeams are switched off.

When the ignition is switched off, by openingor closing the driver's door or unbuckling the

Seite 62

Controls Driving


driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remainsactive.

Radio ready stateActivate radio ready state:▷ When the engine is running: press the

Start/Stop button.Some electronic systems/power consumersremain ready for operation.The radio ready state switches off automati‐cally:▷ After approx. 8 minutes.▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐

tral locking system.▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still bestarted.

Starting the engineHints

Enclosed areasDo not let the engine run in enclosed

areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes maylead to loss of consciousness and death. Theexhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, anodorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.◀

Unattended vehicleDo not leave the vehicle unattended with

the engine running; doing so poses a risk ofdanger.Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐mission in selector lever position P or neutralto prevent the vehicle from moving.◀

Repeated starting in quick successionAvoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to

start the vehicle or starting the vehicle severaltimes in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuelis not burned or is inadequately burned, posing

a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐lytic converter.◀

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary. Start driving atmoderate engine speeds.

Diesel engineIf the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process maybe delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐heating.A Check Control message is displayed.

Automatic transmission

Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for acertain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐gine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐

tral.3. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for acertain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐gine starts.

Engine stopHints


leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ple, cannot start the engine.◀

Seite 63

Driving Controls


Set the parking brake and further securethe vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upwardand downward inclines, further secure the ve‐hicle, for example, by turning the steeringwheel in the direction of the curb. ◀

Before driving into a car washIn order for the vehicle to be able to roll into acar wash, pay attention to the information re‐garding Washing in automatic car washes, re‐fer to page 225.

Automatic transmission

Switching off the engine1. Engage selector lever position P with the

vehicle stopped.2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.The radio ready state is switched on.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button.2. Shift into first gear or reverse.3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe conceptThe Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.The system switches off the engine during astop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at trafficlights. The ignition remains switched on. Theengine starts again automatically for drivingoff.

Automatic modeAfter every start of the engine using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is inthe last selected state, refer to page 65.When the Auto Start Stop function is active, itis available when the vehicle is traveling fasterthan about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stopThe engine is switched off automatically dur‐ing a stop under the following conditions:Automatic transmission:▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐

tion D.▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the

vehicle is stopped.▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.Manual transmission:▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is

not pressed.▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.The air flow of the air conditioner is reducedwhen the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe READY display in the tach‐ometer signals that the AutoStart/Stop function is ready tostart the engine automatically.

The display indicates that theconditions for an automatic en‐gine stop have not been satis‐fied.

NoteThe engine is not switched off automatically inthe following situations:▷ External temperature too low.

Seite 64

Controls Driving


▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐matic climate control is running.

▷ The passenger compartment has not yetbeen heated or cooled to the requiredlevel.

▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ature.

▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or thesteering wheel is being turned.

▷ After driving in reverse.▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

matic climate control is switched on.▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.▷ The parking assistant is activated.▷ Stop-and-go traffic.▷ The selector lever is in position N or M/S.▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.

Starting the engineThe engine starts automatically under the fol‐lowing conditions:▷ Automatic transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal.▷ Manual transmission:

The clutch pedal is pressed.After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety modeAfter the engine switches off automatically, itwill not start again automatically if any one ofthe following conditions are met.▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and

the driver's door is open.▷ The hood was unlocked.Some indicator lamps light up for varyinglengths of time.The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

NoteEven if driving away was not intended, the de‐activated engine starts up automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐

partment when the cooling function isswitched on.

▷ The steering wheel is turned.▷ Automatic transmission: change from se‐

lector lever position D to N, R or M/S.▷ Automatic transmission: change from se‐

lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.▷ The vehicle begins rolling.▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

matic climate control is switched on.▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐

partment when the heating is switched on.▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐

cur, for example, if the brake pedal is de‐pressed a number of times in succession.

Activating/deactivating the systemmanually

Using the button

Press the button.

▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function isdeactivated.The engine is started during an automaticengine stop.

Seite 65

Driving Controls


The engine can only be stopped or startedvia the Start/Stop button.

▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function isactivated.

Switching off the vehicle during anautomatic engine stopDuring an automatic engine stop, the vehiclecan be switched off permanently, e.g., whenleaving it.

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition isswitched off. The Auto Start/Stop functionis deactivated.Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐matically.

2. Set the parking brake.Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivationIn certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐sons, such as when the driver is detected to beabsent.

MalfunctionThe Auto Start/Stop function no longerswitches of the engine automatically. A CheckControl message is displayed. It is possible tocontinue driving. Have the system checked.

Parking brakeApplyingThe lever automatically engages after beingpulled up.

The indicator lamp lights up red. Theparking brake is set.Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadianmodels

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guidethe lever down.

HintsUse while drivingIf on a rare occasion it is necessary to

use the parking brake while driving, do not useexcessive force when applying it. When usingit, keep the button on the lever depressed.Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐ing the parking brake may cause the rearwheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀

To prevent corrosion and braking control onone side only, lightly apply the parking brakeperiodically while coasting, if traffic conditionspermit.The brake lamps will not light up if the parkingbrake is engaged.

Turn signal, high beams,headlamp flasherTurn signal

Do not fold in the exterior mirrorsDo not fold in the exterior mirror while

driving and when the turn signals/warningflashers are working, or else the additionalflasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon‐ger be in the prescribed position and will bedifficult to see.◀

Seite 66

Controls Driving


Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.To switch off manually, press the lever to theresistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lampindicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activationPress the lever to the resistance point.The turn signal flashes three times.The function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Triple turn signal"The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Signaling brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point and holdit there for as long as you want the turn signalto flash.

High beams, headlamp flasher

▷ High beams, arrow 1.▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper systemSwitching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

Do not switch on the wipers if frozenDo not switch on the wipers if they are

frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, thewiper blades and the windshield wiper motormay be damaged.◀

No wiper operation on dry windshieldDo not use the windshield wipers if the

windshield is dry, as this may damage thewiper blades or cause them to become wornmore quickly.◀

No wiper operation with wipers foldedaway

Do not switch on the wipers if they are foldedaway, otherwise the hood or the wipers may bedamaged.◀

Seite 67

Driving Controls


Switching on

Press the wiper levers up.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operationwhen the vehicle is stationary.

▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or pressonce beyond the resistance point.The wipers switch to normal speed whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the wiper levers down.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Brief wipe: press down once.▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down

once.▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor

The conceptWithout the rain sensor, the frequency of thewiper operation is preset.The rain sensor automatically controls the timebetween wipes depending on the intensity ofthe rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ror.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐ing operation is started. If there is frost, wiperoperation is not started.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washesDeactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise,damage could be caused by undesired wiperactivation.◀

Seite 68

Controls Driving


Setting the frequency or sensitivity ofthe rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

Clean the windshield, headlamps

Pull the wiper lever.The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐lar intervals when the vehicle lights areswitched on.

Do not use the washer system at freezingtemperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any dangerthat the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐erwise, your vision could be obscured. For thisreason, use antifreeze.Avoid using the washer when the reservoir isempty; otherwise, you could damage thepump.◀

Windshield washer nozzlesThe windshield washer nozzles are automati‐cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Switching on the rear window wiper

Press the wiper lever forward: intermittentwipe. When reverse gear is engaged, the sys‐tem switches to continuous operation.To clean the rear window, press the wiper leverfurther forward.

Fold-out position of the wipersRequired when changing the wiper blades orunder frosty conditions, for example.

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the

wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐shield.

3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the pointof resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐onds, until the wiper remains in a nearlyvertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

Fold the wipers back downBefore switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; other‐wise, the wipers may become damaged whenthey are switched on.◀

1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers

move to their resting position and areready for operation.

Seite 69

Driving Controls


Washer fluidGeneral information

Antifreeze for washer fluidAntifreeze is flammable and can cause

injury if it is used incorrectly.Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐tion.Only keep it in the closed original containerand inaccessible to children.Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐tainer.United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio isregulated by the U.S. EPA and many individualstates; do not exceed the allowable washerfluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow theusage instructions on the washer fluid con‐tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐centrate or the equivalent.◀

Washer fluid reservoirAdding washer fluidOnly add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely toavoid contact between the washer fluid andhot engine parts.Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a riskto personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ervoir.Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐centrate and tap water and – if required – with a

washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐turer's recommendations.Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintainthe correct mixing ratio.Do not add windshield washer concentrate andantifreeze undiluted and do not fill with purewater; this could damage the wiper system.Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it canresult in clogging of the windshield washernozzles.Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 USgal/1 liter.

Manual transmissionShifting

Shifting into 5th or 6th gearWhen shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear couldlead to engine damage.◀

Reverse gearSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.To overcome the resistance move the selectorlever in a dynamic movement to the left andengage the reverse gear.

Automatic transmission withSteptronicSelector lever positions

D Drive, automatic positionGear position for normal vehicle operation. Allforward gears are available.

R is ReverseSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

Seite 70

Controls Driving


N is NeutralUse in automatic car washes, for example. Thevehicle can roll.When the ignition is switched off, refer topage 62, selector lever position P is engagedautomatically.

P ParkSelect only when the vehicle is stationary. Thedrive wheels are blocked.P is engaged automatically:▷ After the engine is switched off when the

vehicle is in radio ready state, refer topage 63, or when the ignition is switchedoff, refer to page 62, and when position Ror D is engaged.

▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐tion N is engaged.

▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver'sdoor is opened, and the brake pedal is notpressed while the vehicle is stationary andposition D or R is engaged.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐lector lever position P of the automatic trans‐mission is engaged. Otherwise, the vehiclemay begin to roll.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum drivingperformance. Press on the accelerator pedalbeyond the resistance point at the full throttleposition.

Engaging selector lever positions▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector

lever position P until the engine is runningand the brake is applied.

▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on thebrake pedal before shifting out of P or N;otherwise, the shift command will not beexecuted: shift lock.

Press on the brake pedal until youstart driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a gear, maintain pressure on thebrake pedal until you are ready to start.◀

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.After releasing the selector lever, it returns toits center position.

Press unlock button, in order to:▷ Engage R.▷ Shift out of P.

Seite 71

Driving Controls


Engaging P

Press button P.

Sport program and manual mode

Activating the sport program

Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐tor lever position D.The sport program of the transmission is acti‐vated.

Activating the M/S manual mode1. Press the selector lever to the left out of

selector lever position D.2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward.Manual mode becomes active and the gear ischanged.The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster, e.g., M1.Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/Smanual mode is automatically upshifted asneeded.

Switching to manual mode▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

ward.▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐

wards.Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engineand road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐sible if the engine speed is too high.The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Sport automatic transmission: preventautomatic upshifting in M/S manualmodeFor vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐ple, if one of the following conditions is met:▷ DSC deactivated.▷ TRACTION activated.▷ SPORT+ activated.In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.

Ending the sport program/manualmodePush the selector lever to the right.D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allowyou to shift gears quickly while keeping bothhands on the steering wheel.

Seite 72

Controls Driving


If the shift paddles on the steering wheel areused to shift gears in automatic mode, thetransmission temporarily switches to manualmode.If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicleis not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐tem switches back into automatic mode if theselector lever is in selector lever position D.▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engineand road speeds, for example downshifting isnot possible if the engine speed is too high.The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe selector lever position is dis‐played, e.g.: P.

Sport automatic transmission: LaunchControl

The conceptLaunch Control enables optimum accelerationon surfaces with good traction.

HintsComponent wearDo not use Launch Control too often;

otherwise, this may result in premature wear ofcomponents due to the high stress placed onthe vehicle.◀

Did not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 168, period.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSCagain as soon as possible.An experienced driver may be able to achievebetter acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

RequirementsLaunch Control is available when the engine iswarmed up, that is, after uninterrupted drivingof at least 6 miles/10 km.To start with Launch Control do not steer thesteering wheel.

Start with launch controlWhile the engine is running:

1. Press button or select with theDriving Dynamics Control Sport+.TRACTION is displayed in the instrumentcluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFFlights up.

2. Engage gear S.3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on

the brake.4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal

beyond the resistance point at the fullthrottle position.A flag symbol appears in the instrumentcluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within3 seconds, release the brake.

Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.Launch Control adjusts to the surroundingconditions, e.g., wet pavement, when usedagain.

Seite 73

Driving Controls


DisplaysVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐


Instrument clusterOverview, instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge 792 Speedometer3 Indicator/warning lamps 774 Tachometer 79

5 Engine oil temperature 796 Current fuel consumption 817 Electronic displays 768 Display/reset miles 80

Seite 74

Controls Displays


Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features

1 Fuel gauge 792 Speedometer3 Indicator/warning lamps 774 Tachometer 79

5 Engine oil temperature 796 Current fuel consumption 817 Electronic displays 768 Display/reset miles 80

Seite 75

Displays Controls


Electronic displaysOverview, instrument cluster

1 Messages, e.g., Check Control 77Time 80Date 80External temperature 80Selection lists 84Service requirements 81

Miles/trip miles 80Computer 84

2 Transmission display 73Gear shift indicator 82

3 Status, Driving Dynamics Control 117

Seite 76

Controls Displays


Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features

1 Time 80External temperature 80Date 80Selection list, such as for the radio 84Speed limit detection 82Computer 84Miles/trip miles 80Navigation display, see user's manual forNavigation, Entertainment and Communi‐cation.

Status, Driving Dynamics Control 1172 Energy recovery 81

Transmission display 73Current fuel consumption 81ECO PRO 175

3 Messages, e.g., Check Control 77Service requirements 81

Check ControlThe conceptThe Check Control system monitors functionsin the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctionsin the monitored systems.A Check Control message is displayed as acombination of indicator or warning lamps andtext messages in the instrument cluster and inthe Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be outputand a text message may appear on the ControlDisplay.

Indicator/warning lampsThe indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐nations and colors.Several of the lamps are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily when theengine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Seite 77

Displays Controls


Overview: indicator/warning lamps

Symbol Function or system

Turn signal.

Front fog lamps.

High beams.

High-beam Assistant.

Parking lamps, headlamp control.

Active Cruise Control.

Vehicle detection, Active CruiseControl: collision warning.

Pedestrian warning.

Cruise control.

Lane departure warning.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control isdeactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac‐tion Control is activated.

Tire Pressure Monitor.Flat Tire Monitor.

Safety belts.

Symbol Function or system

Airbag system.

Steering system.

Engine functions.

Parking brake.Brake system.

In Canadian modelsParking brake.Brake system.

ABS Antilock Brake System.

In Canadian modelsABS Antilock Brake System.

At least one Check Control mes‐sage is displayed or is stored (sym‐bol in display).

Text messagesText messages in combination with a symbolin the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐trol message and the meaning of the indicatorand warning lamps.

Supplementary text messagesAdditional information, such as on the cause ofa fault or the required action, can be called upvia Check Control.The supplementary text of urgent messages isautomatically displayed on the Control Display.

SymbolsDepending on the Check Control message, thefollowing functions can be selected.

Seite 78

Controls Displays


▷ "Owner's Manual"Display additional information about theCheck Control message in the IntegratedOwner's Manual.

▷ "Service request"Contact your service center.

▷ "Roadside Assistance"Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the onboard computer button on theturn signal lever.

▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐played continuously and are not cleareduntil the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐sages are displayed consecutively.These messages can be hidden for approx.8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐played again automatically.

▷ Other Check Control messages are hiddenautomatically after approx. 20 seconds.They are stored and can be displayedagain later.

Displaying stored Check Controlmessages1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Check Control"4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completionSpecial messages that are displayed duringdriving are displayed again after the ignition isswitched off.

Fuel gaugeThe vehicle inclination maycause the display to vary.US models: the arrow beside thefuel pump symbol shows whichside of the vehicle the fuel filler

flap is on.Hints on refueling, refer to page 184.

TachometerAlways avoid engine speeds in the red warningfield. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐rupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at

the low temperature end.Drive at moderate engineand vehicle speeds.

▷ Normal operating tempera‐ture: the pointer is in themiddle or in the left half ofthe temperature display.

▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end ofthe temperature range. A Check Controlmessage is also displayed.

Coolant temperatureIf the coolant along with the engine becomestoo hot, a Check Control message is displayed.Check the coolant level, refer to page 204.

Seite 79

Displays Controls


Odometer and trip odometerDisplay

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Show/reset kilometersPress the knob.▷ When the ignition is

switched off, the time, theexternal temperature andthe odometer are displayed.

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the tripodometer is reset.

External temperatureIf the indicator drops to+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signalsounds.A Check Control message isdisplayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Ice on roadsEven at temperatures above

+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice onroads.Therefore, drive carefully on bridges andshaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐creased risk of an accident.◀

TimeThe time is displayed at the bot‐tom of the instrument cluster.Setting the time and time for‐mat, refer to page 87.

DateThe date is displayed in thecomputer.Setting the date and date for‐mat, refer to page 87.

RangeDisplay

After the reserve range isreached:▷ A Check Control message is

displayed briefly.▷ The remaining range is

shown on the onboard com‐puter.

▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, suchas when cornering quickly, operation of theengine is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continu‐ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptlyRefuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine isnot ensured and damage may occur.◀

Displaying the cruising rangeDepending on the equipment version, therange is displayed in the instrument cluster.

1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. "Additional indicators"

Seite 80

Controls Displays


Current fuel consumptionInstrument cluster

Displays the current fuel con‐sumption. You can checkwhether you are currently driv‐ing in an efficient and environ‐mentally-friendly manner.

Instrum. cluster with enhancedfeatures

Displays the current fuel con‐sumption. You can checkwhether you are currently driv‐ing in an efficient and environ‐mentally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current fuelconsumption1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. "Additional indicators"The bar display for the current fuel consump‐tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Energy recoveryDisplay

The kinetic energy of the vehicleis converted to electrical energywhile coasting. The vehicle bat‐tery is partially charged and fuelconsumption can be reduced.

Service requirementsThe conceptThe driving distance or the time to the nextscheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in

the instrument cluster after the ignition isswitched on.The current service requirements can be readout from the remote control by the servicespecialist.

DisplayData regarding the service status or legallymandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐matically transmitted to your service centerbefore a service due date.

Detailed information on servicerequirementsMore information on the scope of service re‐quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐play.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and le‐gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐tion.

Symbols

Sym‐bols

Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled mainte‐nance or a legally mandated inspec‐tion is approaching.

The service deadline has alreadypassed.

Entering appointment datesEnter the dates for the required inspections.

Seite 81

Displays Controls


Ensure that the vehicle date and time are setcorrectly.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service required"4. "§ Vehicle inspection"5. "Date:"6. Adjust the settings.7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service RequestData regarding the service status or legallymandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐matically transmitted to your service centerbefore a service due date.You can check when your service center wasnotified.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. Open "Options".4. "Last Service Request"

Gear shift indicatorThe conceptThe system recommends the most fuel effi‐cient gear for the current driving situation.Depending on how the vehicle is equipped andthe country-specific version of the vehicle, thegear shift indicator is active in the manualmode of the automatic transmission and in themanual transmission.Indicators to shift up or down are displayed inthe instrument cluster.On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, theengaged gear is displayed.

Manual transmission: displays

Symbol Description

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

Shift up to fuel efficient gear.

Shift down to fuel efficient gear.

Shift into neutral.

Automatic transmission: displays

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Speed limit detection withNo Passing InformationThe concept

Speed limit detectionSpeed limit detection uses a symbol in theshape of a traffic sign to display the currentlydetected speed limit. The camera at the baseof the interior rearview mirror detects trafficsigns at the edge of the road as well as variableoverhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extrasymbols for wet road conditions, etc. are alsodetected and compared with vehicle interiordata, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐played depending on the situation. The systemtakes into account the information stored in

Seite 82

Controls Displays


the navigation system and also displays speedlimits present on routes without signs.

No Passing InformationNo Passing Information in the instrument clus‐ter displays the beginnings and ends of nopassing zones detected by the camera. Thesystem accounts for only the beginnings andends of No Passing zones marked by signs.No display is shown:▷ In countries where No Passing zones are

primarily identified with road markings.▷ On routes without signage.▷ Where there are railroad crossings, high‐

way markings or other situations where nosignage is present, but passing would notbe permitted.

HintsPersonal judgmentThe system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the trafficsituation.The system assists the driver and does not re‐place the human eye.◀

At a glance

Camera

The camera is located near the base of themirror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. "Speed limit information"If speed limit detection is switched on, it canbe displayed on the info display in the instru‐ment cluster via the onboard computer.No Passing Information is displayed togetherwith the activated speed limit information.

DisplayThe following is displayed in the instrumentcluster.

Speed limit detectionCurrent speed limit.

Speed limit detection is notavailable.

Speed limit detection can also be displayed inthe Head-up Display.

No Passing Information▷ Start of No Passing zone.▷ End of No Passing zone.▷ No Passing Information not

available.

No Passing Information can also be displayedin the Head-up Display.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional andmay provide incorrect information in the fol‐lowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

Seite 83

Displays Controls


▷ When signs are concealed by objects.▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ When the windshield behind the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered by a sticker, etc.

▷ In the event of incorrect detection by thecamera.

▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigationsystem are incorrect.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐tem.

▷ When roads differ from the navigation,such as due to changes in the road net‐work.

▷ When passing buses or trucks with aspeed sticker.

▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

Selection lists in theinstrument clusterThe conceptDepending on the equipment version, the fol‐lowing can be displayed or operated using thebuttons and the thumbwheel on the steeringwheel and the displays in the instrument clus‐ter and the Head-up Display:▷ Current audio source.▷ Redial on telephone.▷ Activation of the voice activation system.In addition, programs of the Driving DynamicsControl are displayed.

Display

Depending on the equipment version, the listin the instrument cluster can differ from the il‐lustration.

Activating a list and adjusting thesetting

On the right side of the steering wheel, turnthe thumbwheel to activate the correspondinglist.Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐wheel.

ComputerIndication in the info display

The information from the on‐board computer is shown in theinfo display in the instrumentcluster.

Seite 84

Controls Displays


Calling up information on the infodisplay

Press the onboard computer button on theturn signal lever.Information is displayed on the info display ofthe instrument cluster.

Information at a glanceRepeatedly pressing the button on the turnsignal lever calls up the following informationon the info display:▷ Range.▷ Average fuel consumption.▷ Current fuel consumption.▷ Average speed.▷ Date.▷ Speed limit detection.▷ Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.

▷ Distance to destination.When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.

▷ Arrow view of navigation system.When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐play is inactive.

▷ ECO PRO bonus range.

Adjusting the info displayYou can select what information from the on‐board computer is to be displayed on the infodisplay of the instrument cluster.

1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

RangeDisplays the estimated cruising range availablewith the remaining fuel.It is calculated based on your driving style overthe last 20 miles/30 km.If there is only enough fuel left for less than45 miles/80 km, the color of the displaychanges.

Average fuel consumptionThe average fuel consumption is calculated forthe period during which the engine is running.The average fuel consumption is calculated forthe distance traveled since the last reset by theonboard computer.

Average speedPeriods in which the vehicle is parked with theengine manually stopped do not enter into thecalculation of the average speed.

Resetting average valuesPress and hold the computer button on theturn signal lever.

Distance to destinationThe distance remaining to the destination isdisplayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐gation system before the trip is started.The distance to the destination is adopted au‐tomatically.

Seite 85

Displays Controls


Time of arrivalThe estimated time of arrival isdisplayed if a destination is en‐tered in the navigation systembefore the trip is started.The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit detectionDescription of the speed limit detection, referto page 82, function.

Trip computerThe vehicle features two types of computer.▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as

often as necessary.▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an

overview of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Trip computer"3. "Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are resetapprox. 4 hours after the vehicle comes toa standstill.

Display on the Control DisplayDisplay the onboard computer or trip computeron the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption orspeed1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Onboard info"3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"4. "Yes"

Sport displaysThe conceptIn the Control Display, the current values forpower and torque can be displayed.

Displaying sport displays in theControl Display1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Sport displays"

Speed warningThe conceptDisplay of a speed limit which, when reached,should cause a warning to be issued.The warning is repeated if the vehicle speeddrops below the set speed limit once by atleast 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing thelimit1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Warning at:"4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is

displayed.5. Press the controller.The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Warning"4. Press the controller.

Setting your current speed as the limit1. "Settings"2. "Speed"

Seite 86

Controls Displays


3. "Select current speed"4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as thelimit.

Settings on the ControlDisplayTime

Setting the time zone1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Time zone"4. Select the desired time zone.The time zone is stored.

Setting the time1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Time:"4. Turn the controller until the desired hours

are displayed.5. Press the controller.6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐

nutes are displayed.7. Press the controller.The time is stored.

Setting the time format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.The time format is stored.

Automatic time settingDepending on the equipment version, the time,date and, if necessary, the time zone are up‐dated automatically.

1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Auto time set"

Date

Setting the date1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Date:"4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed.5. Press the controller.6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year.The date is stored.

Setting the date format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the languageTo set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Language:"4. Select the desired language.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Seite 87

Displays Controls


Setting the voice dialogVoice dialog for the voice activation system,refer to page 25.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measureTo set the units for fuel consumption, route/distance and temperature:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. Select the desired menu item.4. Select the desired unit.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Brightness

Setting the brightnessTo set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Control display"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐

ness is set.5. Press the controller.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ness control may not be clearly visible.

Assist system information

Display on the Control DisplayInformation on the Assist system can be dis‐played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐play.

1. "Settings"2. "Control display"3. "Driver assistance info"

Head-up DisplayThe concept

This system projects important informationinto the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.The driver can get information without avertinghis or her eyes from the road.

Display visibilityThe visibility of the displays in the Head-upDisplay is influenced by the following factors:▷ Certain sitting positions.▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐

play.▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.▷ Wet roads.▷ Unfavorable light conditions.If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐tings.

Switching on/off1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Head-Up Display"

Display

Overview▷ Speed.▷ Navigation system.▷ Check Control messages.▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.

Seite 88

Controls Displays


▷ Driver assistance systems.Some of this information is only displayedbriefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-upDisplay1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Displayed information"4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display.The settings are stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Setting the brightnessThe brightness is automatically adjusted to theambient light.The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the controller.When the low beams are switched on, thebrightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐ing.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Adjusting the height1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Height"4. Turn the controller.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Setting the rotation1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"

3. "Rotation"4. Turn the controller.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Special windshieldThe windshield is part of the system.The shape of the windshield makes it possibleto display a precise image.A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ages from being displayed.Therefore, have the special windshield re‐placed by a service center only.

Seite 89

Displays Controls


LampsVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance

1 Rear fog lamps2 Front fog lamps3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive

Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐come lamps, Daytime running lights

4 Lamps off, daytime running lights5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam

Assistant7 Instrument lighting

Parking lamps/low beams,headlamp controlGeneral informationSwitch position: 0, ,

If the driver door is opened with the ignitionswitched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐cally switched off at these switch settings.

Parking lampsSwitch position : the vehicle lamps lightup on all sides, e.g., for parking.Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐riods; otherwise, the vehicle battery may be‐come discharged and it would then be impos‐sible to start the engine.When parking, it is preferable to switch on theone-sided roadside parking lamps, refer topage 91.

Low beamsSwitch position with the ignition switchedon: the low beams light up.

Welcome lampsWhen the vehicle is parked, leave the switch inposition or : parking and interior lampscome on briefly when the vehicle is unlockeddepending on the ambient light.

Activating/deactivating1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Welcome lights"The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Headlamp courtesy delay featureThe low beams stay lit for a short while if theheadlamp flasher is switched on after the igni‐tion is switched off.

Setting the duration1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"

Seite 90

Controls Lamps


3. "Pathway lighting:"4. Set the duration.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Automatic headlamp controlSwitch position : the low beams areswitched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. Theindicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup.A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon cancause the lights to be switched on.The low beams always stay on when the foglamps are switched on.

Personal responsibilityThe automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ment in determining when the lamps should beswitched on in response to ambient lightingconditions.For example, the sensors are unable to detectfog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, youshould always switch on the lamps manuallyunder these conditions.◀

Daytime running lightsWith the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ning lights light up in position 0, or .After the ignition is switched off, the parkinglamps light up in position .

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries, daytime running lights arecompulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐tivate the daytime running lights.

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Daytime running lamps"The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Roadside parking lamps

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching onWith the ignition switched off, press the levereither up or down past the resistance point forapprox. 2 seconds.

Switching offBriefly press the lever to the resistance point inthe opposite direction.

Adaptive Light ControlThe conceptAdaptive Light Control is a variable headlampcontrol system that enables dynamic illumina‐tion of the road surface.Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐rameters, the light from the headlamp followsthe course of the road.In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads orwhen turning, one of the two front fog lamps isswitched on as a cornering lamp. As a resultthe inside of the curve is better lighted.

ActivatingSwitch position with the ignition switchedon.The cornering lamps are automaticallyswitched on depending on the steering angleor the use of turn signals.

Seite 91

Lamps Controls


To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.When driving in reverse, only the corneringlamp is active.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or hasfailed. Have the system checked as soon aspossible.

High-beam AssistantThe conceptWhen the low beams are switched on, this sys‐tem automatically switches the high beams onand off or suppresses the light in the areas thatblind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐trolled by a sensor on the front of the interiorrearview mirror. The assistant ensures that thehigh beams are switched on whenever the traf‐fic situation allows. The driver can intervene atany time and switch the high beams on and offas usual.

Activating

The High-beam Assistant can be activatedwhen the low beams are switched on.

1. Turn the light switch to or .2. Press the button on the turn signal lever,

arrow.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐tomatically brightened or dimmed.The system responds to light from oncomingtraffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and toadequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster lights up when the systemswitches on the high beams. Depend‐

ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in theareas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,the blue indicator light will stay on.

Switching the high beams on and offmanually

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

The High-beam Assistant can be switched offwhen manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ton on the turn signal lever.

System limitsPersonal responsibilityThe high-beam assistant cannot serve as

a substitute for the driver's personal judgmentof when to use the high beams. Therefore,manually switch off the high beams in situa‐tions where this is required to avoid a safetyrisk.◀

Seite 92

Controls Lamps


The system is not fully functional in situationssuch as the following, and driver interventionmay be necessary:▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation.▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders andwagons; when driving close to train or shiptraffic; and at animal crossings.

▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐coming traffic on freeways.

▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in thepresence of highly reflective signs.

▷ At low speeds.▷ When the windshield behind the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered with stickers, etc.

Camera


Fog lampsFront fog lampsThe low beams must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicatorlamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer topage 91, is activated, the low beams will comeon automatically when you switch on the frontfog lamps.When the high beams or headlamp flasher areactivated, the front fog lamps are not switchedon.

Instrument lightingAdjusting

The parking lamps or low beamsmust be switched on to adjustthe brightness.Adjust the brightness using thethumbwheel.

Interior lampsGeneral informationThe interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lampsand courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐cally.The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐enced by the thumbwheel for the instrumentlighting.

1 Interior lamps2 Reading lamp

Seite 93

Lamps Controls


Switching the interior lamps on andoff

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button forapprox. 3 seconds.Switch back on: press button.

Reading lampsPress the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rearnext to the interior lamps.

Ambient lightDepending on the equipment, the lighting canbe adjusted in the interior for some lights.

Selecting color scheme1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Ambient:"4. Select the desired setting.If the color scheme of the line is selected andthe welcome lamps are activated, the welcomelamps are displayed in the color of the linewhen the vehicle is unlocked.

Setting the brightnessThe brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐justed via the thumbwheel for the instrumentlighting or on the Control Display.

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Brightness:"4. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 94

Controls Lamps


SafetyVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐


Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver2 Front airbag, front passenger3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag5 Knee airbags

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver and frontpassenger by responding to frontal impacts inwhich safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐quate restraint.

Side airbagsIn a lateral impact, the side airbag supports theside of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbagsIn a lateral impact, the head airbag supportsthe head.

Knee airbagThe knee airbag supports the legs in a frontalimpact.

Seite 95

Safety Controls


Protective actionAirbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-endcollisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimalprotective effect of the airbags

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands atthe 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, tokeep the danger of injury to your hands orarms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐gered.

▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐jects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag onthe front passenger side as a storage area.

▷ Keep the dashboard and window on thefront passenger side clear, i.e. do not coverwith adhesive labels or coverings, and donot attach holders such as for navigationinstruments and mobile phones.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet andlegs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuriescan occur if the front airbag is triggered.

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions orother objects on the front passenger seatthat are not approved specifically for seatswith integrated side airbags.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such asjackets, over the backrests.

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their headsaway from the side airbag and do not restagainst the head airbag; otherwise, injuriescan occur if the airbags are triggered.

▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

bag cover panels, cover them or modifythem in any way.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐nents or the wiring in the airbag system.This also applies to steering wheel covers,the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillarsand the sides of the headliner.◀

Even when all instructions are followed closely,injury from contact with the airbags cannot beruled out in certain situations.The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporaryhearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivationand after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme‐diately after the system has been triggered;otherwise, there is the danger of burns.Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐mantled and the airbag generator scrapped bythe service center or a workshop that has thenecessary authorization for handling explo‐sives.Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐tem could lead to failure in an emergency orundesired triggering of the airbag, either ofwhich could result in injury.◀

Warnings and information on the airbags arealso found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbagsystem

When the ignition is switched on, thewarning lamp in the instrument clusterlights up briefly and thereby indicates

the operational readiness of the entire airbagsystem and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the

ignition is turned on.▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Seite 96

Controls Safety


When there is a malfunction, have theairbag system checked immediately

When there is a malfunction, have the airbagsystem checked immediately; otherwise, thereis a risk that the system does not function asexpected in the event of an accident despitecorresponding severity of the accident.◀

Automatic deactivation of the frontpassenger airbagsThe system determines whether the front pas‐senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐sistance of the human body.The front, knee, and side airbag on the frontpassenger side are activated or deactivatedaccordingly.

Leave feet in the footwellMake sure that the front passenger

keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,the front passenger airbags may not functionproperly.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the frontpassenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front pas‐senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐structions under Children on the front passen‐ger seat.◀

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children and adults,the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐vated in certain sitting positions. In this case,the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐bags lights up.In this case, change the sitting position so thatthe front passenger airbags are activated andthe indicator lamp goes out.If it is not possible to activate the airbags, havethe person sit in the rear.To make sure that the occupied seat cushioncan be evaluated correctly

▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball matsor other items to the front passenger seatunless they are specifically recommendedby the manufacturer of your vehicle.

▷ Do not place any electronic devices on thepassenger seat if a child restraint system isto be installed on it.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

▷ No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front passengerairbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐bags indicates the operating state of the frontpassenger airbags.The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐tivated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights upwhen a child who is properlyseated in a child restraint fix‐ing system intended for thatpurpose is detected on theseat or the seat is empty.The airbags on the frontpassenger side are not acti‐vated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,for example, a correctly seated person ofsufficient size is detected on the seat. Theairbags on the front passenger side are ac‐tivated.

Seite 97

Safety Controls


Detected child seatsThe system generally detects children seatedin a child seat, especially in the child seats thatwere required by NHTSA when the vehicle wasmanufactured. After installing a child seat,make sure that the indicator lamp for the frontpassenger airbags lights up. This indicatesthat the child seat has been detected and thefront passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and frontpassenger airbagThe strength with which the driver's and frontpassenger airbags are triggered depends onthe position of the driver's and front passengerseats.To maintain the accuracy of this function overthe long-term, calibrate the front seats when acorresponding message appears on the Con‐trol Display.

Calibrating the front seatsA corresponding message appears on theControl Display.

1. Move the respective seat forward all theway.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. Itmoves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.The calibration procedure is completed whenthe message on the Control Display disap‐pears.If the message continues to be displayed, re‐peat the calibration.If the message does not disappear after a re‐peat calibration, have the system checked assoon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movementEnsure that the area of movement of the

seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injuryor damage to objects.◀

Tire Pressure Monitor TPMThe conceptThe system monitors tire pressure in the fourmounted tires. The system warns you if thereis a significant loss of pressure in one or moretires. For this purpose, sensors in the tirevalves measure the tire inflation pressure.

HintsTire damage due to external factorsSudden tire damage caused by external

influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀

Pay attention to the other information and indi‐cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer topage 191, as well when using the system.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been reset with thecorrect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐sured.Reset the system after each adjustment of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.Always use wheels with TPM electronics toensure that the system will operate properly.

Status displayThe current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"The status is displayed.

Status control displayThe tire and system status is indicated by thecolor of the wheels and a text message on theControl Display.

Seite 98

Controls Safety


All wheels greenSystem is active and will issue a warning rela‐tive to the tire inflation pressures stored duringthe last reset.

One wheel is yellowA flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure inthe indicated tire.

All wheels are yellowA flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure inseveral tires.

Wheels, grayThe system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasonsfor this may be:▷ The system is being reset.▷ Malfunction.

Carry out resetReset the system after each adjustment of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Perform reset"4. Start the engine - do not drive away.5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset".6. Drive away.The tires are shown in gray and the status isdisplayed.After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for ashort period, the tire inflation pressures set areaccepted as reference values. The reset iscompleted automatically during driving.After a successfully completed Reset, thewheels on the Control Display are shown ingreen and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)active" is displayed.

The trip can be interrupted at any time. If youdrive away again, the reset resumes automati‐cally.

Low tire pressure messageThe yellow warning lamp lights up. ACheck Control message is displayed.▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure.▷ No reset was performed for the system.

The system therefore issues a warningbased on the tire inflation pressures beforethe last reset.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

When a low inflation pressure is indicated,DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onif necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis correct, it is possible that a reset was notcarried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor.Then perform the reset.

Seite 99

Safety Controls


If an identification is not possible, pleasecontact the service center.

2. Fix the flat tire.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speedYou can continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis correct, it is possible that a reset was notcarried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. Inthat case, carry out a reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on the cargo loadand the driving style and conditions.For a vehicle containing an average load, thepossible driving distance is approx.50 miles/80 km.When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance, and altered self-steeringproperties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance de‐pends on how the vehicle is used during thetrip, the actual distance may be smaller orgreater depending on the driving speed, roadconditions, external temperature, cargo load,etc.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.A loss of tire inflation pressure results in achange in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance and altered self-steeringproperties.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reducespeed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tirecould come loose and cause an accident. Donot continue driving, and contact your servicecenter.◀

Required inflation pressure checkmessageA Check Control message is displayed in thefollowing situations▷ The system has detected a wheel change,

but no reset was carried out.▷ Inflation was not carried out according to

specifications.▷ The tire pressure has fallen below the level

of the last confirmation.In this case:▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as

needed.▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire

change.

System limitsThe system does not function properly if a re‐set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire isreported even though the tire inflation pres‐sures are correct.The tire pressure depends on the temperatureof the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g.,due to driving or because of the heat of theSun, the tire inflation pressure increases also.The tire pressure is reduced when the tire

Seite 100

Controls Safety


temperature falls again. This behavior maycause a warning to be issued if temperaturesfall very sharply.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning lamp flashes andthen lights up continuously. A CheckControl message is displayed. No flat

tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.

Display in the following situations:▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:

have the service center check it if neces‐sary.

▷ Malfunction: have the system checked byyour service center.

▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.Reset the system again.

▷ Disturbance by systems or devices withthe same radio frequency: after leaving thearea of the disturbance, the system auto‐matically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure MonitoringSystemEach tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold and in‐flated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stopping ability. Pleasenote that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has alsobeen equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐tor is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐tion, the telltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuously illumi‐nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐function exists. When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of replace‐ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐tale after replacing one or more tires or wheelson your vehicle to ensure that the replacementor alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire MonitorThe conceptThe system detects a pressure loss on the ba‐sis of speed differences between the individualwheels while driving.In the event of a pressure loss, the diameterand therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐sponding wheel change. This is detected andreported as a flat tire.The system does not measure the actual infla‐tion pressure in the tires.

Seite 101

Safety Controls


Functional requirementsThe system must have been initialized whenthe tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐tion of the tire inflation pressure and afterevery tire or wheel change.

Status displayThe current status of the Flat Tire Monitor canbe displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"The status is displayed.

InitializationThe initialization process adopts the set infla‐tion tire pressures as reference values for thedetection of a flat tire. Initialization is started byconfirming the inflation pressures.Do not initialize the system when driving withsnow chains.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Perform reset"4. Start the engine - do not drive away.5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".6. Drive away.The initialization is completed while driving,which can be interrupted at any time.The initialization automatically continues whendriving resumes.

Indication of a flat tireThe yellow warning lamp lights up. ACheck Control message is displayed.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflationpressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐bility Control is switched on if necessary.

System limitsSudden tire damageSudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐vance.◀

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tirescannot be detected. Therefore, check the tireinflation pressure regularly.The system could be delayed or malfunction inthe following situations:▷ When the system has not been initialized.▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface.▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive

wheels, high lateral acceleration.▷ When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires.

Seite 102

Controls Safety


If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may nothave been initialized. In this case, initializethe system.If an identification is not possible, pleasecontact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speedYou can continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may nothave been initialized. In this case, initializethe system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on the cargo loadand the driving style and conditions.For a vehicle containing an average load, thepossible driving distance is approx.50 miles/80 km.When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance, and altered self-steeringproperties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance de‐pends on how the vehicle is used during thetrip, the actual distance may be smaller or

greater depending on the driving speed, roadconditions, external temperature, cargo load,etc.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.A loss of tire inflation pressure results in achange in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐duced lane stability during braking, a longerbraking distance and altered self-steeringproperties.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reducespeed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tirecould come loose and cause an accident. Donot continue driving, and contact your servicecenter.◀

Intelligent SafetyThe conceptDepending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐telligent Safety consists of one or more of thefollowing systems, which can help to avoid animminent collision. These systems are activeautomatically every time the engine is startedusing the Start/Stop button:▷ Collision warning, refer to page 104.▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 109.

NotePersonal responsibilityThe system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of thetraffic situation.Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise anaccident is still possible despite all warnings.◀

Seite 103

Safety Controls


At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera


Switching on/offThe Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐cally active after each engine start via the start/stop button.

Press the button: the systems areswitched off. The LED goes out.

Press the button: the systems are switched off.The LED lights up.

Settings can be made on the Control Display.

Collision warningDepending on how the equipment is equipped,the collision warning system consists of one ofthe two systems:▷ Collision warning with City Braking func‐

tion, refer to page 104.▷ Collision warning with braking function, re‐

fer to page 107

Collision warning with CityBraking functionThe conceptThe system can help to prevent accidents. Ifan accident cannot be prevented, the systemhelps to reduce the collision speed.The system issues a warning if there is immi‐nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐pendently.The automatic braking intervention is donewith limited force and duration.The system is controlled via a camera in thebase of the mirror.The collision warning is available even if cruisecontrol has been deactivated.When the vehicle is intentionally brought closeto a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed toavoid false warnings.

General informationThe system issues a two-phase warning of adanger of collision with vehicles at speedsabove approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of thesewarnings may vary depending on the currentdriving situation.Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐vention occurs when appropriate.

Seite 104

Controls Safety


Detection range

Vehicles are observed when they are travelingin the same direction of movement if they arelocated within the detection range of the sys‐tem.

At a glance



Camera

The camera is located near the base of themirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rear view mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active every timethe engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ton.

Switching offPress button: the system is switchedoff. The LED goes out.

Re-press button: the system is switched on.The LED lights up.

Setting the prewarning timeThe prewarning time can be set via iDrive.

1. "Settings"2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"3. Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.The selected time is stored for the remotecontrol currently in use.

Warning with braking function

NoteAdapting your speed and driving styleThe warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her drivingspeed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

DisplayIf a collision with a vehicle detected in this wayis imminent, a warning symbol appears on theinstrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

Seite 105

Safety Controls


Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ing.Increase braking and distance.

The vehicle flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ing.You are requested to intervene bybraking or making an evasive ma‐neuver.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself to in‐tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brakebooster is a sufficiently fast and sufficientlystrong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition,if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slowspeed to a complete stop.Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐vention up until reaching a complete stop, theengine may be shut down.The braking intervention is executed only ifDSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onand Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐vated.The braking intervention can be interrupted bypressing on the accelerator pedal or by activelymoving the steering wheel.

Tow-starting and towingWhen tow-starting and towing the vehi‐

cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;otherwise, improper behavior of the brakingfunction of individual systems could result inan accident.◀

System limitsBe alertDue to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late orimproperly. Therefore, always be alert andready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ger of an accident occurring.◀

Detection rangeThe system's detection capabilities are limited.This may result in the warning not being is‐sued or being issued late.For example, the following situations may notbe detected:▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed.▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you or sharply decelerating vehicles.▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.▷ Pedestrians.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, for example, DSCOFF.

▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐sor is dirty or obscured.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ately after vehicle shipment.

▷ If there is constant dimming because ofoncoming light, for example, from the sunlow in the sky.

Seite 106

Controls Safety


Prewarning sensitivityDepending on the set prewarning time, thismay result in increased false warnings.

Collision warning withbraking functionThe conceptThe system issues a warning if there is immi‐nent danger of a collision and also includes abraking function.If the vehicle is equipped with Active CruiseControl with Stop & Go, the collision warning iscontrolled via the cruise control radar sensor.The collision warning is available even if cruisecontrol has been deactivated.When the vehicle is intentionally brought closeto a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed toavoid false warnings.

General informationThe system issues a two-phase warning of apossible danger of collision with vehicles atspeeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timeof these warnings may vary depending on thecurrent driving situation.

Detection range

It responds to objects if they are detected bythe radar.

At a glance



Switching on/off


Switching offPress button: the system is switchedoff. The LED goes out.

Re-press button: the system is switched on.The LED lights up.

Setting the prewarning timeThe prewarning time can be set via iDrive.

1. "Settings"2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"3. Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.The selected time is stored for the remotecontrol currently in use.

Seite 107

Safety Controls


Display

Warning stages

PrewarningThis warning is issued, for example, whenthere is the impending danger of a collision orthe distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Acute warning with braking functionWarning of the imminent danger of a collisionwhen the vehicle approaches another object ata relatively high differential speed.The driver must intervene actively when thereis an acute warning. If necessary, the driver isassisted by an automatic braking interventionin a possible risk of collision.The detection of objects can be influeneced bytechnical system limitations, e. g. pedestriansor stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐tion range and functional restricitions are to beconsidered.The braking intervention is executed with lim‐ited braking force and for a brief period only.The intervention can bring the vehicle to acomplete stop.The braking intervention is executed only ifDSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onand Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐vated.Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the brakingintervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.No automatic delay occurs.

Adapting your speed and driving styleThe warning does not relieve the driver


The braking intervention can be interrupted bypressing on the accelerator pedal or by activelymoving the steering wheel.



Display in the instrument clusterThe collision warning can be issued in the in‐strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, andacoustically.

Warning stages

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ing.Increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ing.You are requested to intervene bybraking or making an evasive ma‐neuver.

Adapting your speed and driving styleThe display does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her drivingspeed and style to the traffic conditions.◀


be not be issued at all, or may be issued late orimproperly. Therefore, always be alert andready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ger of an accident occurring.◀

Detection rangeThe system's detection capabilities are limited.

Seite 108

Controls Safety


This may result in the warning not being is‐sued or being issued late.For example, the following situations may notbe detected:▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed.▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you or sharply decelerating vehicles.▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.▷ Pedestrians.▷ Stationary objects.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, for example, DSCOFF.

▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured.

Prewarning sensitivityDepending on the set prewarning time, thismay result in increased false warnings.

Pedestrian warning with citybraking functionThe conceptThe system can help to prevent accidents withpedestrians.The system issues a warning in the city drivingspeed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐lision with pedestrians and includes a brakingfunction.The system is controlled via the camera in thebase of the interior mirror.

General informationThe system issues a warning with brightnessstaring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk ofcollision with pedestrians and assists with abrake intervention shortly before a collision.It responds to persons that are within the de‐tection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ided into two areas.▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left.A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐cated within the central area. A warning is is‐sued about pedestrians who are located withinthe extended area only if they are moving inthe direction of the central area.

At a glance


Seite 109

Safety Controls



Camera


Switching on/off


Switching offPress the button: the systems areswitched off. The LED goes out.

Press the button: the systems are switched off.The LED lights up.

Warning with braking function

NoteAdapting your speed and driving styleThe warning does not relieve the driver


DisplayIf a collision with a person detected in this wayis imminent, a warning symbol appears on theinstrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐nal sounds.Intervene immediately by braking or

making an evasive maneuver.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself to in‐tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brakebooster is a sufficiently fast and sufficientlystrong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition,if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slowspeed to a complete stop.Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐vention up until reaching a complete stop, theengine may be shut down.The braking intervention is executed only ifDSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onand Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐vated.The braking intervention can be interrupted bypressing on the accelerator pedal or by activelymoving the steering wheel.




be not be issued at all, or may be issued late orimproperly. Therefore, always be alert and

Seite 110

Controls Safety


ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ger of an accident occurring.◀

Detection rangeThe detection capability of the camera is lim‐ited.This may result in the warning not being is‐sued or being issued late.For example, the following situations may notbe detected:▷ Partially covered pedestrians.▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of the viewing angle or contour.▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional or maynot be available in the following situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐

shield are dirty or covered.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐

gine, via the Start/Stop knob.▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.▷ When it is dark outside.

Lane departure warningThe conceptStarting at a specific speed, this system alertsyou when the vehicle on streets with lanemarkings is about to leave the lane. Thisspeed, depending on the country version, isbetween 35 mph/55 km/h and45 mph/70 km/h.

When switching on the system below thisspeed, a message is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster.The steering wheel begins vibrating gently inthe event of warnings. The time of the warningmay vary depending on the current driving sit‐uation.The system does not provide a warning if theturn signal is set before leaving the lane.

HintsPersonal responsibilityThe system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of thecourse of the road and the traffic situation.In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐cle.◀

At a glance


Lane departure warning

Seite 111

Safety Controls


Camera



▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Display in the instrument cluster▷ Lines: system is activated.▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking

was detected and warnings can beissued.

Issued warningIf you leave the lane and if a lane marking hasbeen detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐brating.If the turn signal is set before changing thelane, a warning is not issued.

End of warningThe warning ends:▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.▷ When returning to your own lane.▷ When braking hard.

▷ When using the turn signal.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐

ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lanemarkings such as in construction areas.

▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,ice, dirt or water.

▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.▷ When the lane markings are covered by

objects.▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered with stickers, etc.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ately after vehicle shipment.

Active Blind Spot DetectionThe concept

Two radar sensors below the rear bumpermonitor the area behind and next to the vehicleat speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.The system indicates whether there are vehi‐cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approachingfrom behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.

Seite 112

Controls Safety


The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lightsup dimly.

Before you change lanes after setting the turnsignal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐uations described above.The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirrorflashes and the steering wheel vibrates.

HintsPersonal responsibilityThe system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of thetraffic situation.Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise anaccident is still possible despite all warnings.◀

At a glance


Active Blind Spot Detection

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located under the rearbumper.


▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The system can issue warnings at speedsabove approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Display

Information stageThe dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐cates when there are vehicles in the blind spotor approaching from behind.

WarningIf the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in thecritical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly

Seite 113

Safety Controls


and the lamp in the mirror housing flashesbrightly.The warning stops when the turn signal isswitched off, or the other vehicle leaves thecritical zone.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own.▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered

with stickers.A Check Control message is displayed whenthe system is not fully functional.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is gov‐erned by the following:FCC ID:▷ NBG009014A.Compliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐




Brake force displayThe concept

▷ During normal brake application, the outerbrake lamps light up.

▷ During heavy brake application, the innerbrake lamps light up in addition.

Seite 114

Controls Safety


Driving stability control systemsVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Antilock Brake System ABSABS prevents locking of the wheels duringbraking.The vehicle remains steerable even during fullbrake applications, thus increasing activesafety.ABS is operational every time you start the en‐gine.

Brake assistantWhen you apply the brakes rapidly, this systemautomatically produces the maximum brakingforce boost. This then reduces braking dis‐tance to a minimum during full braking. Thissystem utilizes all of the benefits provided byABS.Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedalfor the duration of the full braking.

DSC Dynamic StabilityControlThe conceptDSC prevents traction loss in the drivingwheels when driving away and accelerating.DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐

ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep thevehicle on a steady course by reducing enginespeed and by applying brakes to the individualwheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situationAn appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver.The laws of physics cannot be repealed, evenwith DSC.Therefore, do not reduce the additional safetymargin by driving in a risky manner.◀

Indicator/warning lampsThe indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐trols the drive forces and brake forces.The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFFWhen DSC is deactivated, driving stability isreduced during acceleration and when drivingin bends.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSCagain as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSCPress and hold the button, but not lon‐ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.The DSC system is switched off.Steering and, depending on the equipment,the chassis are adjusted for sporty driving.

Activating DSCPress the button.

Seite 115

Driving stability control systems Controls


DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp goout.

Indicator/warning lampsWhen DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC isdeactivated.

DTC Dynamic TractionControlThe conceptThe DTC system is a version of the DSC inwhich forward momentum is optimized.The system ensures maximum forward mo‐mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ited.It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ate caution.You may find it useful to briefly activate DTCunder the following special circumstances:▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads.▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in

deep snow or on loose surfaces.▷ When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC DynamicTraction ControlActivating the Dynamic Traction Control DTCprovides maximum traction on loose ground.Driving stability is limited during accelerationand when driving in bends.

Activating DTCPress the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument clus‐ter and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lightsup.

Deactivating DTCPress the button again.TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐

tor lamp go out.

xDrivexDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSCfurther optimize traction and driving dynamics.The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐tributes the drive forces to the front and rearaxles as demanded by the driving situation androad surface.

Dynamic Damping ControlThe conceptThis system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐eling on uneven road surfaces.The system enhances driving dynamics andcomfort as required for the road surface anddriving style.

ProgramsThe system offers several different programs.The programs can be selected via the DrivingDynamics Control, refer to page 117.

SPORTConsistently sporty control of the shock ab‐sorbers for greater driving agility.

Seite 116

Controls Driving stability control systems


SPORT+Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐sorbers for greater driving agility when drivingwith limited driving stabilization.

COMFORT/ECO PROBalanced control of the vehicle.

Variable sport steeringThe variable sport steering increases thesteering angle of the front wheels at largesteering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves orwhen parking. Steering becomes more direct.It also varies the force required to turn thewheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.This results in a sporty steering response. Inaddition, it becomes easier to steer duringparking and maneuvering.

Driving Dynamics ControlThe conceptThe Driving Dynamics Control can be used toadjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle.Various programs can be selected for this pur‐pose. The Driving Dynamics Control and theDSC OFF buttons can each be used to activatea program.

Operating the programs

Press the button Program

DSC OFFTRACTION

SPORT+SPORTCOMFORTECO PRO

Automatic program changeThe system automatically switches to COM‐FORT in the following situations:▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐

TION or DSC OFF mode.

DSC OFFWhen DSC OFF, refer to page 115, is active,driving stability is limited during accelerationand when driving in bends.

TRACTIONWhen TRACTION is active, the vehicle hasmaximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTCDynamic Traction Control, refer to page 116, isactivated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐celeration and when driving in bends.

SPORT+Sporty driving with optimized chassis andadapted engine control with limited driving sta‐bilization.Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.The driver handles several of the stabilizationtasks.

Activating SPORT+Press the button repeatedly untilSPORT+ appears in the instrument

cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lightsup.

Automatic program changeWhen activating cruise control, the programautomatically switches to SPORT mode.

Indicator/warning lampsSPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 117



The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the suspensionand engine control for greater driving agilitywith maximum driving stabilization.The program can be configured to individualspecifications. The configuration is stored forthe remote control currently in use.

Activating SPORTPress button repeatedly until SPORTis displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORTWhen the display is activated on the ControlDisplay, refer to page 119, the SPORT drivingmode can be set to individual specifications.▷ Activating SPORT.▷ "Configure SPORT"▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐vated:

1. "Settings"2. "Driving mode"3. "Configure SPORT"4. Configure driving mode.This configuration is retrieved when theSPORT driving mode is activated.

COMFORTFor a balanced tuning with maximum drivingstabilization.

Activating COMFORTPress button repeatedly until COM‐FORT is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

In certain situations, the system automaticallychanges to the NORMAL program, automaticprogram change, refer to page 117.

ECO PROECO PRO, refer to page 175, provides consis‐tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption formaximum range with maximum driving stabili‐zation.Comfort functions and the engine controllerare adjusted.The program can be configured to individualspecifications.

Activating ECO PROPress button repeatedly until ECOPRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO1. Activate ECO PRO.2. "Configure ECO PRO"Make the desired settings.

Configuring drive programSettings can be made for the following drivingprograms in Driving mode:▷ SPORT, refer to page 118.▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 176.

Displays

Program selectionPressing the button displays alist of the selectable programs.

Seite 118

Controls Driving stability control systems


Selected programThe selected program is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

Display on the Control DisplayProgram changes can be displayed on theControl Display.

1. "Settings"2. "Driving mode"3. "Driving mode info"

Drive-off assistantThis system supports driving away on gradi‐ents. The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the footbrake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive awaywithout delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle isheld in place for approx. 2 seconds.Depending on the vehicle load or when a traileris being used, the vehicle may roll backslightly.

Driving off without delayAfter releasing the foot brake, start driv‐

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistantwill not hold the vehicle in place for more thanapprox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will beginrolling back.◀

Seite 119



Driving comfortVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Active Cruise Control withStop & Go function, ACCThe conceptThis system can be used to select a desiredspeed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐cally on clear roads.To the extent possible, the system automati‐cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicleahead of you.The distance that the vehicle maintains to thevehicle ahead of you can be varied.For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐tomatically reduces the speed, applies thebrakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐cle ahead begins moving faster.If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, thesystem is able to detect this within the givensystem limits. If the vehicle ahead of yourdrives away again from a halt, your vehicle isable to accelerate if operated accordingly.Even if some time passes before the vehicleahead of you drives away again, your own vehi‐cle can still be accelerated automatically andsimply.As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates tothe desired speed.

The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐dients, but may not be maintained on uphillslopes if engine power is insufficient.

General informationDepending on the set driving program, thecharacteristics of the cruise control canchange in certain areas.

HintsPersonal responsibilityEven an active system does not release

the driver from personal responsibility for thedriving process, especially for lane tracking,adaptation of speed, distance and driving styleto the traffic conditions.Because of technical system limits, the systemcannot independently react appropriately in alltraffic situations.Monitor the driving process, the surroundingarea and what is occurring in traffic continu‐ously and attentively and actively intervene asrequired, e.g., by braking, steering or makingan evasive maneuver.◀

Unfavorable weather conditionsIn the event of unfavorable weather and

light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall,slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorerrecognition of vehicles as well as short-terminterruptions for vehicles that are already de‐tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐rent traffic events. Intervene actively whennecessary, e.g., by braking, steering or makingan evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is dan‐ger of an accident.◀

Seite 120

Controls Driving comfort


At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press thebutton

Function

System on/off, interrupt, refer topage 121

Maintaining/storing the speed,refer to page 122

Resume speed, refer topage 123

Reduce distance, refer topage 123

Increase distance, refer topage 123

Rocker switch:Maintaining/storing the speed,refer to page 122Changing, maintaining, andstoring the speed, refer topage 122

The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐try-specific variants.

Radar sensorA radar sensor is located in the front bumperfor detecting vehicles on the road ahead of thevehicle.

A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐tection of vehicles.

▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐move layers of snow and ice carefully.

▷ Do not cover the view field of the radarsensor.

Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching onPress the button on the steeringwheel.

The indicator lamps in the instrument clusterlight up and the mark in the speedometer is setto the current speed.Cruise control can be used.

Switching offDeactivated or interrupted systemIf the system is deactivated or inter‐

rupted, actively intervene by braking, steeringand, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐curring.◀

If switching off the system while stationary,press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Press the button.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.

Seite 121

Driving comfort Controls


The displays go out. The stored desired speedand distance are deleted.

InterruptingWhen active, press the button.

If interrupting the system while stationary,press on the brake pedal at the same time.The system is automatically interrupted in thefollowing situations:▷ When the brakes are applied.▷ When drive mode D is removed.▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is

activated or DSC is deactivated.▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are

opened when the vehicle is standing still.▷ If the system has not detected objects for

an extended period, e.g., on a road withvery little traffic without road edge linemarkings.

▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.

Maintaining/storing the speedPress the button.

Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.This is displayed, refer to page 124, in thespeedometer and briefly in the instrumentcluster.When cruise control is maintained or stored,DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,if necessary.

Changing, maintaining, and storingthe speedThe rocker switch can be pressed while thesystem is interrupted to maintain and store thecurrent speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Controlis switched on, if necessary.

Adapting the desired speedAdapt the desired speed to the road con‐

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐curring.◀

Speed differencesLarge differences in speed relative to ve‐

hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐sated by the system for example in the follow‐ing situations:▷ When quickly approaching a slowly moving

vehicle.▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves

into the wrong lane.◀

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedlyuntil the desired speed is set.

Seite 122



If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed if the road isclear.▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speedincreases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressedpast the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by a maxi‐mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat theaction.

DistanceSelecting a distanceAdjust the distance according to the traf‐

fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there isthe danger of an accident occurring. Maintainthe prescribed safety distance.◀

Reduce distancePress the button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

The selected distance, refer to page 124, isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.

Increase distancePress the button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

The selected distance, refer to page 124, isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.

Calling up the desired speed anddistance

While drivingPress the button with the systemswitched on.

In the following cases, the stored speed valueis deleted and cannot be called up again:

▷ When the system is switched off.▷ When the ignition is switched off.

While standingBefore leaving the vehicle, secure itagainst rolling

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀

The system brought the vehicle to a completestandstill.▷ Green marking in the speedometer:

Your vehicle accelerates automatically assoon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐dar sensor moves off.

▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange:no automatic driving away.To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐matically, press the accelerator or pressthe RES or SET button.

Rolling bars in the distance display indicatethat the vehicle in the radar sensor detectionrange has moved off.Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressingon the brake pedal and it is standing behindanother vehicle:

1. Press the button to call up a storeddesired speed.

2. Release the brake pedal.3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press

the RES rocker switch when the vehicleahead of you drives away.

Seite 123



Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed▷ The marking lights up green:

the system is active.▷ The marking lights up or‐

ange: the system has beeninterrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the systemis switched off.

Brief status displaySelected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for CheckControl messages, it is possible that the sys‐tem requirements for operation are currentlynot met.

Distance to vehicle ahead of youThe selected distance to the vehicle drivingahead of you is shown.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4This value is set after the system isswitched on.

The system has been interrupted ordistance control is deactivated be‐cause the accelerator pedal is beingpressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance display

Distance control is deactivated be‐cause the accelerator pedal is beingpressed; a vehicle was detected.

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has drivenaway.

Indicator/warning lampsPersonal responsibilityThe indicator and warning lamps do not

relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapthis or her desired driving speed and style tothe traffic conditions.◀

The vehicle symbol lights up orange:A vehicle has been detected ahead ofyou.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange:The conditions are not adequate foroperating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds:You are requested to intervene by

braking or making an evasive maneuver.

System limits

Speed rangeBest results are achieved when using the sys‐tem on well-developed roads and highways.The system is functional at speeds beginningat approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.The maximum speed that can be set dependson the vehicle.The system can also be activated when sta‐tionary.

Seite 124



Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐uation when using the system.

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and theautomatic braking capacity are limited.Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of youfor instance might not be detected.

Limited detection capacityBecause of the limits to the detection ca‐

pacity, you should be alert at all times so thatyou can intervene if necessary; otherwise,there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀

DecelerationThe system does not decelerate when a sta‐tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the endof traffic congestion.The system also does not respond to:▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road

users.▷ Red traffic lights.▷ Stationary objects.▷ Cross traffic.▷ Oncoming traffic.

No warningsA warning may not be issued when ap‐

proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise,there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detecteduntil it is completely within the same lane asyour vehicle.

Swerving vehiclesIf a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not beable to automatically restore the selected dis‐tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,the system requests that the driver interveneby braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐vers, if necessary. You must react yourself;otherwise, there is the danger of an accidentoccurring.◀

Unexpected lane change

If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly movesinto another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐cle, you yourself must react, as the systemdoes not react to stopped vehicles.

Seite 125



Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, thespeed is reduced slightly in the curve, althoughcurves cannot be anticipated in advance.Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriatespeed.In tight curves, situations may result due to therestricted detection range of the system inwhich a vehicle driving ahead of you may notbe detected at all, or not until after a consider‐able delay.

When approaching a curve, the system mayreact briefly to the vehicles in the next lane dueto the bend of the curve. Any deceleration ofthe vehicle by the system can be compensatedfor by briefly accelerating. After the acceleratorpedal is released, the system becomes activeagain and independently controls the speed.

Driving awayIn some situations, the vehicle cannot driveaway automatically, e.g., on steep inclines orbehind bumps in the road.

Radar sensor

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is gov‐erned by the following:FCC ID:▷ OAYARS3-ACompliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐




MalfunctionThe system cannot be activated if the radarsensor is not aligned correctly. This may becaused by damage incurred during parking, forexample.A Check Control message is displayed if thesystem fails.

Cruise controlThe conceptThe system is functional at speeds beginningat approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.It maintains the speed that was set using thecontrol elements on the steering wheel.The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐gine braking action is insufficient.

Seite 126



Unfavorable conditionsDo not use the system if unfavorable

conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐stant speed, for instance:▷ On curvy roads.▷ In heavy traffic.▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface.Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐cle and cause an accident.◀

General informationDepending on the set driving program, thecharacteristics of the cruise control canchange in certain areas.

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press the button Function

System on/off, interrupt

Store speed

Resume speed

Rocker switch: change,hold, store speed

Controls

Switching onPress the button on the steeringwheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to thecurrent speed.Cruise control can be used.

Switching offDeactivated or interrupted systemIf the system is deactivated or inter‐

rupted, actively intervene by braking and, ifnecessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise,there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀

Press the button.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored desired speedis deleted.

InterruptingWhen active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if:▷ The brakes are applied.▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few

seconds or released while a gear is not en‐gaged.

▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐rent speed.

▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated.▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.

Maintaining/storing the current speedPress the button.

Or

Seite 127



Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.This is displayed, refer to page 128, in thespeedometer and briefly in the instrumentcluster.When cruise control is maintained or stored,DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,if necessary.

Changing/maintaining speedThe rocker switch can be pressed while thesystem is interrupted in order to maintain andstore the current speed.

Adapting the desired speedAdapt the desired speed to the road con‐

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐curring.◀

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedlyuntil the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed if the road isclear.▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speedincreases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressedpast the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by a maxi‐mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.The maximum speed that can be set de‐pends on the vehicle.

▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐celerates the vehicle without requiringpressure on the accelerator pedal. Afterthe rocker switch is released, the vehiclemaintains its final speed. Pressing theswitch beyond the resistance point causesthe vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speedPress the button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.


Indicator lampDepending on how the vehicle is equip‐ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐

tem is switched on.

Desired speed▷ The marking lights up green:

the system is active.▷ The marking lights up or‐

ange: the system has beeninterrupted.

Seite 128



▷ The marking does not light up: the systemis switched off.

Brief status displaySelected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for CheckControl messages, it is possible that the sys‐tem requirements for operation are currentlynot met.

PDC Park Distance ControlThe conceptPDC support when parking. Slowly approach‐ing an object behind or, with the appropriatePDC equipment, also in front of your vehicle issignaled by:▷ Signal tones.▷ Visual display.

General informationMeasurements are made by ultrasound sen‐sors in the bumpers.The range, depending on the obstacle and en‐vironmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.An acoustic warning is first given:▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐

ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.To ensure full operability:▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., by stickers, bi‐

cycle racks and the like.▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods andmaintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

HintsPersonal responsibilityEven an active system does not relieve

the driver from personal responsibility for thedriving process.Because of technical system limits, the systemcannot independently react appropriately in alltraffic situations.Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐ing process, the area surrounding the vehicleand the traffic situation, and actively intervenewhen required, otherwise, there is a risk of anaccident.◀

Avoid driving quickly with PDCAvoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yetactive.For technical reasons, the system may other‐wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀

At a glance

With front PDC: button in vehicle

PDC Park Distance Control

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running, engage selector leverposition R.

Seite 129



Automatic deactivation during forwardtravelThe system switches off when a certain drivingdistance or speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if necessary.

With front PDC: switching on/offmanually

Press the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Display

Signal tonesWhen approaching an object, an intermittenttone is sounded that indicates the position ofthe object. For example, if an object is de‐tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signaltone sounds from the left rear speaker.The shorter the distance to the object be‐comes, the shorter the intervals.If the distance to a detected object is less thanapprox. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone issounded.With front PDC: if objects are located both infront of and behind the vehicle, an alternatingcontinuous signal is sounded.The signal tone is switched off:▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.▷ When selector lever position P is engaged

on vehicles with automatic transmission.

VolumeThe volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐justed similar to the tone and volume settingsof the radio.The setting is stored for the remote controlcurrently in use.

Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object canbe shown on the Control Display. Objects thatare farther away are displayed on the ControlDisplay before a signal tone sounds.A display appears as soon as Park DistanceControl (PDC) is activated.The range of the sensors is represented in thecolors red, green and yellow.When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐played, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Limits of ultrasonic measurementThe detection of objects can reach the physi‐cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., inthe following circumstances:▷ For small children and animals.▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐

trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles orloud machines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions, such ashigh relative humidity, rain, snowfall ex‐treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of othervehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ With moving objects.▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,

such as fences.▷ For objects with porous surfaces.

Seite 130



Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, canmove into the blind area of the sensors beforeor after a continuous tone sounds.

False warningsPDC may issue a warning under the followingconditions even though there is no obstaclewithin the detection range:▷ In heavy rain.▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in

ice.▷ When sensors are covered in snow.▷ On rough road surfaces.▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed

bumps.▷ In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐rages.

▷ In heavy exhaust.▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steamcleaners or neon lights.The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐ous tone alternating between the front andrear speakers. As soon as the malfunctiondue to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐ger present, the system is again fully func‐tional.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.The range of the sensors is shown as a shadedarea on the Control Display.PDC has failed. Have the system checked.To ensure full operability:▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ Do not adhere any stickers to the sensors.▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not


Surround ViewThe conceptSurround View comprises various camera as‐sistance systems that help the driver whenparking, maneuvering, and at complex exitsand intersections.▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 131▷ Side View, refer to page 134.▷ Top View, refer to page 135.

Rearview cameraThe conceptThe rearview camera provides assistance inparking and maneuvering backwards. The areabehind the vehicle is shown on the ControlDisplay.

HintsCheck the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐dent could result from road users or objects lo‐cated outside the picture area of the backupcamera.◀

At a glance


Rearview camera

Seite 131



Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of thetailgate. The image quality may be impaired bydirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 228.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running, engage selector leverposition R.The rearview camera image is displayed if thesystem was switched on via the iDrive.


Switching on/off manuallyPress the button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

Switching on the rearview camera viathe iDriveWith PDC activated or Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera"The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement▷ The rearview camera is switched on.▷ The tailgate is fully closed.

Activating the assistance functionsMore than one assistance function can be ac‐tive at the same time.▷ Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐played.

▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Pathway lines

▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐age when in selector lever position R.

▷ Help you to estimate the space requiredwhen parking and maneuvering on levelroads.

▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐gle and are continuously adjusted to thesteering wheel movements.

Seite 132



Turning circle lines

▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐age.

▷ Show the course of the smallest possibleturning circle on a level road.

▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed af‐ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐tain angle.

Obstacle marking

General information

Marks for detected obstacles can be shown inthe rearview camera image.Their colored steps match the markings of thePDC. This simplifies estimation of the distanceto the object shown.

Parking using pathway and turningcircle lines1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐

cle lines lead to within the limits of theparking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point wherethe pathway line covers the correspondingturning circle line.

Display settings

BrightnessWith the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

ContrastWith the rearview camera switched on:



Seite 133



System limits

Detection of objectsVery low obstacles as well as high, protrudingobjects such as ledges may not be detected bythe system.Assistance functions also take into accountdata of the PDC.Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer topage 129.The objects displayed in the Control Displayunder certain circumstances are closer thanthey appear. Therefore, do not estimate thedistance from the objects on the display.

Side ViewThe conceptSide View provides an early look at cross trafficat blind driveways and intersections. Roadusers concealed by obstacles to the left andright of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐tively late from the driver's seat. To improvevisibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐cle record the traffic situation on each side.

NotesThe images from both cameras are shown si‐multaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle on blind driveways and intersections withyour own eyes. Otherwise, an accident couldresult from road users or objects located out‐side the picture area of the Side View cam‐eras.◀

At a glance


Side View

Cameras

Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ture the image.The two camera lenses are located on thesides of the bumper.The image quality may be impaired by dirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 228.

Switching on/off


Automatic deactivation during forwardtravelThe system switches off when a certain drivingdistance or speed is exceeded.

Seite 134



Switch the system back on if necessary.

DisplayThe traffic area to the left and right is displayedon the Control Display.

Guidelines at the bottom of the image showthe position of the front of the vehicle.

BrightnessWith the Side View switched on:

1. "Brightness"2. Turn the controller until the desired setting


ContrastWith the Side View switched on:

1. "Contrast"2. Turn the controller until the desired setting


System limitsThe cameras capture a maximum range of330 ft/100 m.

Top ViewThe conceptTop View provides assistance in parking andmaneuvering. The area around the doors andthe road area around the vehicle are shown onthe Control Display for this purpose.

General informationThe image is captured by two camerasintegrated in the exterior mirrors and by thebackup camera.The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side andrear.In this way, obstacles up to the height of theexterior mirrors are detected early.

NotesCheck the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐dent could result from road users or objects lo‐cated outside the picture area of thecameras.◀

At a glance


Top View

Seite 135



Cameras

The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐ings. The image quality may be impaired bydirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 228.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running, engage selector leverposition R.The Top View and PDC images are displayed ifthe system is switched on via iDrive.



▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.Top View is displayed.

Display

Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object canbe shown on the Control Display.

When the distance to an object is small, a redbar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is inthe PDC display.

The display appears as soon as Top View isactivated.

When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐played, it is possible to switch to top view:

"Rear view camera"

BrightnessWith Top View switched on:



ContrastWith Top View switched on:



Displaying the turning circle andpathway lines▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the

space needed to the side of the vehiclewhen the steering wheel is turned all theway.

▷ The variable, green pathway line assistsyou in assessing the amount of space ac‐tually needed to the side of the vehicle.The lane line depends on the engagedgear and the current steering angle. The

Seite 136



track line is continuously adjusted for thesteering wheel movement.

"Parking aid lines"Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

System limitsTop View cannot be used in the following sit‐uations:▷ With a door open.▷ With the tailgate open.▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.▷ In poor light.A Check Control message is displayed in someof these situations.

Parking assistantThe concept

This system assists the driver in parking paral‐lel to the road.Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaceson both sides of the vehicle.The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐sible parking line and takes control of steeringduring the parking procedure.When parking, also take note of the visual andacoustic information and instructions issuedby the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐view camera and react accordingly.A component of the parking assistant is thePDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 129.

HintsPersonal responsibilityEven an active system does not relieve

the driver from personal responsibility for thedriving process.Because of technical system limits, the systemcannot independently react appropriately in alltraffic situations.Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐ing process, the area surrounding the vehicleand the traffic situation, and actively intervenewhen required, otherwise, there is a risk of anaccident.◀

Changes to the parking spaceChanges to the parking space after it was

measured are not taken into account by thesystem.Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐dent occurring.◀

Transporting loadsLoads that extend beyond the perimeter

of the vehicle are not taken into account by thesystem during the parking procedure.Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐dent occurring.◀

CurbsThe parking assistant may steer the vehi‐

cle over or onto curbs.Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐cle may become damaged.◀

An engine that has been switched off by theAuto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Seite 137



Requirements

For measuring parking spaces▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:

your vehicle's length plus approx.4 ft/1.2 m.

▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking procedure▷ Doors and tailgate closed.▷ Parking brake released.▷ When parking in parking spaces on the

driver's side, the corresponding turn signalmust be set where applicable.

At a glance


Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parkingspaces are located on the wheel arches.To ensure full operability:▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not


▷ Do not paste over sensors.

Switching on/off

Switching on with the buttonPress the button.The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space searchis indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with the reverse gearShift into reverse.The current status of the parking space searchis indicated on the Control Display.To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Switching offThe system can be deactivated as follows:▷ Press the button.

▷ Switch off the ignition.

Seite 138




System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.White: the system is available butnot activated.

The system is activated.

Status displayDepending on the appointment version, differ‐ent views of the status display are shown andare described below as View 1, refer topage 139, or View 2, refer to page 139.

Status of the system, Display 1

The status is displayed with symbols.

Gray: parking space search.Blue: the system is activated. Asuitable parking space wasfound.

The parking procedure is active.Steering control has beenseized.

Status of the parking space search

▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.

The vehicle is parked in the parking spaceif the parking procedure is active.

▷ No display: no parking space search.

Status of the system, Display 2

▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the sideof the vehicle representation. Parking as‐sistant is activated and search for parkingspace active.

▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed nextto the vehicle symbol at the edge of theroad as on the Control Display. When theparking assistant is active, suitable parkingspaces are highlighted.

▷ The parking procedure is ac‐tive. Steering control hasbeen seized.

▷ Parking space search is always activewhenever the vehicle is moving forwardsslow and straight, even if the system is de‐

Seite 139



activated. When the system is deactivated,the displays on the Control Display areshown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistantCheck the traffic situation as wellLoud sounds outside and within the vehi‐

cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐ing assistant and PDC.Check the traffic situation around the vehiclewith your own eyes; otherwise, there is thedanger of an accident.◀

1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐vate it if necessary.The status of the parking space search isindicated on the Control Display.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐play.To achieve the best possible parking posi‐tion, wait for the automatic steering wheelmovement after the gear change when thevehicle is stationary.The end of the parking procedure is indi‐cated on the Control Display.

3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐essary.

Interrupting manuallyThe parking assistant can be interrupted at anytime:▷ "Parking Assistant"▷ Press the button.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is interrupted automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if

he takes over steering.▷ If a gear is selected that does not match

the instruction on the Control Display.

▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.6 mph/10 km/h.

▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfacesif necessary.

▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displaysclearances that are too small.

▷ If a maximum number of parking attemptsor the time taken for parking is exceeded.

▷ When switching to another function on theControl Display.

A Check Control message is displayed.

ResumeAn interrupted parking procedure can be con‐tinued if necessary.Follow the instructions on the Control Displayto do this.

System limits

No parking assistanceThe parking assistant does not offer assis‐tance in the following situations:▷ In tight curves.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads.▷ On slippery ground.▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the

parking space.

Limits of ultrasonic measurementThe detection of objects can reach the physi‐cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., inthe following circumstances:▷ For small children and animals.▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.

Seite 140



▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles orloud machines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions, such ashigh relative humidity, rain, snowfall ex‐treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of othervehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ With moving objects.▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,

such as fences.▷ For objects with porous surfaces.Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, canmove into the blind area of the sensors beforeor after a continuous tone sounds.The parking assistant may identify parkingspaces that are not suitable for parking.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.The parking assistant failed. Have the systemchecked.

Seite 141



Climate controlVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐


Automatic climate control

1 Seat heating, left 512 Vent settings3 Rear window defroster4 Air flow5 AUTO program

6 Temperature7 Seat heating, right 518 Cooling function9 Recirculated-air mode10 Interior temperature sensor

Seite 142

Controls Climate control


Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distributionTurn the wheel to select the de‐sired program or the desired in‐termediate setting.

▷ Windows.▷ Upper body region.▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐

well.▷ Footwell.

Defrosting windows and removingcondensationDirect the air distribution toward windows, in‐crease the air flow and temperature, and, ifnecessary, use the cooling function.

Rear window defrosterPress the button.The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Air flow, manualPress the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The air flow of the air conditioner may be re‐duced automatically to save battery power.

AUTO programPress the button.Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature andoutside influences, the air is directed to thewindshield, side windows, upper body, andinto the footwell.

The cooling function, refer to page 143, isswitched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐gram.

TemperatureTurn the wheel to set the de‐sired temperature.

The automatic climate control reaches thistemperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐put, and then keeps it constant.Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐just the set temperature.

Cooling functionThe passenger compartment can only becooled with the engine running.

Press the button.The air is cooled and dehumidified

and, depending on the temperature setting,warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield mayfog up briefly when the engine is started.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.When using the automatic climate control,condensation water, refer to page 170, devel‐ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Recirculated-air modeYou can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐rarily suspending the supply of outside air. Thesystem then recirculates the air currentlywithin the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to selectan operating mode:

Seite 143

Climate control Controls


▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply

of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐nently blocked.

Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐tain amount of time in order to window fog‐ging.If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if nec‐essary.

Continuous recirculated-air modeThe recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the airquality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ily.◀

Switching the system on/off

Switching offPress the left button for the minimumspeed.

Switching onPress any button except▷ Rear window defroster.▷ Seat heating.

MicrofilterIn external and recirculated air mode the mi‐crofilter filters dust and pollen out of the air.This filter should be replaced during scheduledmaintenance, refer to page 205, of your vehi‐cle.

Seite 144



Automatic climate control with enhanced features

1 Seat heating, left 512 Temperature, left3 AUTO program4 Display5 Maximum cooling6 Temperature, right7 Seat heating, right 518 Cooling function9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐

lated-air mode

10 Air distribution, right11 Air flow, AUTO intensity12 Air distribution, left13 Rear window defroster14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep

clear15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐

sation

Climate control functions in detail

TemperatureTurn the wheel to set the de‐sired temperature.

The automatic climate control reaches thistemperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐

sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐put, and then keeps it constant.Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐just the set temperature.

AUTO programPress the button.

Seite 145



Air flow, air distribution, and temperature arecontrolled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature,AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ces, the air is directed to the windshield, sidewindows, upper body, and into the footwell.The cooling function, refer to page 146, isswitched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐gram.At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐trols the program so as to prevent windowcondensation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO programWith the AUTO program switched on, auto‐matic control of the air flow and air distributioncan be adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase the inten‐

sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the displayof the automatic climate control.

Maximum coolingPress the button.The system is set to the lowest tem‐

perature, maximum air flow and air circulationmode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper bodyregion. The vents need to be open for this.The function is available above an externaltemperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with theengine running.The air flow can be adjusted when the programis active.

Cooling functionThe passenger compartment can only becooled with the engine running.

Press the button.

The air is cooled and dehumidified and, de‐pending on the temperature setting, warmedagain.

Depending on the weather, the windshield mayfog up briefly when the engine is started.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.When using the automatic climate control,condensation water, refer to page 170, devel‐ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air modeYou can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐rarily suspending the supply of outside air. Thesystem then recirculates the air currentlywithin the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to selectan operating mode:

▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

control: a sensor detects pollutants in theoutside air and controls the shutoff auto‐matically.

▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: thesupply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐manently blocked.

Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐tain amount of time in order to window fog‐ging.If the windows are fogged over, switch off therecirculated-air mode and press the AUTObutton to utilize the condensation sensor.Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐shield.

Continuous recirculated-air modeThe recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the airquality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ily.◀

Seite 146



Manual air distributionPress the button repeatedly to selecta program:

▷ Upper body region.▷ Upper body region and footwell.▷ Footwell.▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:

driver's side only.If the windows are fogged over, press theAUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐sor.

Air flow, manualTo be able to manually adjust the air flow,switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display ofthe automatic climate control.The air flow of the automatic climate controlmay be reduced automatically to save batterypower.

Rear window defrosterPress the button.The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Defrosting windows and removingcondensation

Press the button.Ice and condensation are quickly re‐

moved from the windshield and the front sidewindows.

The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐gram is active.If the windows are fogged over, you can alsoswitch on the cooling function or press the

AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐sor.

Switching the system on/off

Switching offPress the left button for the minimumspeed.

Switching onPress any button except▷ Rear window defroster.▷ Seat heating.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterIn external and recirculated air mode the mi‐crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.This filter should be replaced during scheduledmaintenance, refer to page 205, of your vehi‐cle.

VentilationFront ventilation

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,arrow 1.

▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing thevents continuously, arrows 2.

▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐row 3.Toward blue: colder.

Seite 147



Toward red: warmer.

Adjusting the ventilation▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hotfrom the sun.

▷ Draft-free ventilation:Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Ventilation in the rear

▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening andclosing of the vents, arrow 1.

▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐row 2.Toward blue: colder.Toward red: warmer.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,arrow 3.

Parked-car ventilationThe conceptThe parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐essary.The system can be switched on and off at anyexternal temperature, either directly or by us‐ing two preset switch-on times. It remainsswitched on for 30 minutes.Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Activate comf. ventilation"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the switch-on time1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"4. Set the desired time.

Activating the switch-on time1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol flashes when the system has beenswitched on.The system will only be switched on within thenext 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐vated.

Seite 148



Interior equipmentVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Universal garage dooropenerThe conceptThe universal garage door opener can operateup to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐tems such as garage door drives or lightingsystems. The universal garage door opener re‐places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.To operate the remote control, the buttons onthe interior rearview mirror must be program‐med with the desired functions. The hand-heldtransmitter for the particular system is requiredin order to program the remote control.

During programmingDuring programming and before activat‐

ing a device using the integrated universal re‐mote control, ensure that there are no people,animals, or objects in the range of movementof the remote-controlled device; otherwise,there is a risk of injury or damage.Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

Before selling the vehicle, delete the storedfunctions for the sake of security.

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the packag‐ing or in the instructions of the systemto be controlled, the system is gener‐

ally compatible with the universal garage dooropener.If you have any questions, please contact:▷ Your service center.▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐son Controls, Inc.

Controls on the interior rearviewmirror

▷ LED, arrow 1.▷ Buttons, arrow 2.▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐

quired for programming.

Programming

General information1. Switch on the ignition.2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button onthe interior rearview mirror simultaneouslyfor approximately 20 seconds until the LEDon the interior rearview mirror flashes. Thiserases all programming of the buttons onthe interior rearview mirror.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to8 cm away from the buttons on the interior

Seite 149

Interior equipment Controls


rearview mirror. The required distance de‐pends on the manual transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the buttonof the desired function on the hand-heldtransmitter and the button to be program‐med on the interior rearview mirror. TheLED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐gin flashing slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LEDflashes more rapidly. When the LED isflashing faster, this indicates that the but‐ton on the interior rearview mirror has beenprogrammed.If the LED does not flash faster after atleast 60 seconds, change the distance be‐tween the interior rearview mirror and thehand-held transmitter and repeat the step.Several more attempts at different distan‐ces may be necessary. Wait at least15 seconds between attempts.Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior rearview mirror buttonand repeatedly press and release thehand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐onds.

6. To program other functions on other but‐tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the inte‐rior rearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternating-code wireless systemIf you are unable to operate the system afterrepeated programming, please check if thesystem to be controlled features an alternat‐ing-code system.Read the system's operating manual, or pressthe programmed button on the interior rear‐view mirror longer. If the LED on the interiorrearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and thenstays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the systemfeatures an alternating-code system. Flashing

and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐peat for approximately 20 seconds.For systems with an alternating-code system,the universal garage door opener and the sys‐tem also have to be synchronized.Please read the operating manual of the sys‐tem being set up for information on how tosynchronize the system.Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ond person.To synchronize:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the interiorrearview mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing buttonon the system being programmed. Youhave approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on theinterior rearview mirror for approximately3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,repeat this work step up to three times inorder to finish synchronization. Once syn‐chronization is complete, the programmedfunction will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror

button to be programmed.3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED

starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-heldtransmitter for the system to be controlledapprox. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from thebuttons on the interior rearview mirror. Therequired distance depends on the manualtransmitter.

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of thedesired function on the hand-held trans‐mitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this

Seite 150

Controls Interior equipment


indicates that the button on the interiorrearview mirror has been programmed.The system can then be controlled by thebutton on the interior rearview mirror.If the LED does not flash faster after atleast 60 seconds, change the distance andrepeat the step. Several more attempts atdifferent distances may be necessary. Waitat least 15 seconds between attempts.Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior rearview mirror buttonand repeatedly press and release thehand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐onds.

ControlsBefore operationBefore operating a system using the

integrated universal remote control, ensurethat there are no people, animals, or objectswithin the range of movement of the remote-controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk ofinjury or damage.Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

The system, such as the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the interior rear‐view mirror while the engine is running or whenthe ignition is started. To do this, hold downthe button within receiving range of the systemuntil the function is activated. The interior rear‐view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐nal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functionsPress and hold the left and right button on theinterior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashesrapidly. All stored functions are deleted. Thefunctions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compassAt a glance

1 Control button2 Mirror display

Mirror displayThe point of the compass is displayed in themirror when driving straight.

Operating conceptVarious functions can be called up by pressingthe control button with a pointed object, suchas the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.The following setting options are displayed insuccession, depending on how long the con‐trol button is pressed:▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering

setting.▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zonesSets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐fer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 151



World map with magnetic zones

Procedure1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of theset compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐trol button quickly and repeatedly until thenumber of the compass zone correspond‐ing to your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐pass is ready for use again after approximately10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compassThe digital compass must be calibrated in theevent of the following:▷ The wrong point of the compass is dis‐

played.▷ The point of the compass displayed does

not change despite changing the directionof travel.

▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐played.

Procedure1. Make sure that there are no large metallic

objects or overhead power lines near thevehicle and that there is sufficient room todrive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐

prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appearson the display. Next, drive in a completecircle at least once at a speed of no morethan 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points ofthe compass.

Left/right-hand steeringThe digital compass is already set for right orleft-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the languagePress and hold the control button for approx.12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the controlbutton again to switch between English "E"and German "O".

Seite 152



The setting is stored automatically after ap‐proximately 10 seconds.

Ashtray/cigarette lighterAshtray

Opening

Raise cover.

EmptyingTake out the insert.

LighterDanger of burnsOnly hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.Switch off the ignition and take the remotecontrol with you when leaving the vehicle sothat children cannot use the lighter and burnthemselves.◀

Replace the cover after useReinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lightersocket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

The lighter is located next to the ashtray.

Push in the lighter.The lighter can be removed assoon as it pops back out.

Connecting electricaldevicesHints

Do not connect charging devices to the12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle asthis may damage the vehicle battery due to anincreased power consumption.◀

Replace the cover after useReinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lightersocket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

SocketsThe lighter socket can be used as a socket forelectrical equipment while the engine is run‐ning or when the ignition is switched on. Thetotal load of all sockets must not exceed140 watts at 12 volts.Do not damage the socket by using unsuitableconnectors.

Seite 153



Front center console

Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga‐rette lighter.

In the front passenger footwell

The socket is located below the glove com‐partment.

Rear center console

Remove the cover.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the left side in thecargo area.

USB interface for datatransferThe conceptConnection for importing and exporting dataon USB devices, e.g.:▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 33.▷ Music collection.▷ Importing Trips.

NoteFor technical reasons, the USB port for datatransfer may be located in the glove compart‐ment even in vehicles equipped with a naviga‐tion system or TV. If there is a USB port in theglove compartment, it is the USB port intendedfor transferring data.

Seite 154



Overview

The USB interface is located in the glove com‐partment.

Overview

The USB interface is located in the center arm‐rest.

NotesObserve the following when connecting:▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐

nector into the USB interface.▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface.▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Cargo areaCargo cover

Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hookboth sides into the brackets, arrow 2.

Hook the cargo cover on both sidesHook the cargo cover on both sides to

prevent damaging the cover.◀

Do not deposit heavy objectsDo not deposit heavy or hard objects on

the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may pose arisk to occupants, such as during braking andavoidance maneuvers.◀

Do not let the trunk cover snap back intoplace

Do not allow the trunk cover to snap back intoplace; this can damage it.◀

Tilting

When pulled out, the cargo cover can be raisedfor loading. To do this, push the front part ofthe cargo cover upward.

Seite 155



Before closing the rear window or tailgate,push the cargo cover down until it locks intoplace.

Removing

Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull thecargo cover out towards the rear, arrow 2.

InstallingSlide the cargo cover in until it engages onboth sides with an audible click.

StowingIf the cargo cover is not needed, it can bestowed under the narrow cargo floor cover.

1. Fold up the narrow cargo floor cover.2. Insert the left side of the cargo cover and

slide it to the left. Then insert the rightside.

Enlarging the cargo area

General informationThe cargo area can be enlarged by foldingdown the rear seat backrest.

The rear seat backrest is divided into two partsat a ratio of 60 to 40.If equipped with through-loading system: therear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20–40. The sides and the middle section can befolded down separately.

HintsDanger of pinchingBefore folding down the rear seat back‐

rests, ensure that the area of movement of thebackrests is clear. In particular, ensure that noone is located in or reaches into the area ofmovement of the rear seat backrests when themiddle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐jury or damage may result.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seatWhen installing child restraint fixing sys‐

tems, make sure that the child seat is securelyfastened to the backrest of the seat. The angleof the backrest may need to be adjusted and,where necessary, the headrest height may alsoneed to be adjusted, or if possible removed.Make sure that all backrests are securelylocked. Otherwise, the stability of the childseat is limited, and there is an increased risk ofinjury because of unexpected movement of therear seat backrest.◀

Ensure that the lock is securely engagedWhen folding back the backrest, make

sure that it securely locks in place. When thishappens the red warning field on the seat dis‐appears. If the backrest is not properly en‐gaged, transported cargo could enter the pas‐senger compartment during braking or evasivemaneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu‐pants.◀

Using the middle safety beltIf the middle safety belt in the rear is

used, the larger side of the backrest must belocked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not havea restraining effect.◀

Seite 156



Folding down the sides

Reach into the recess and pull forward.

Folding down the middle section

Reach into the recess and pull forward.

Partition netDo not let the partition net snap back intoplace

Do not allow the partition net to snap back intoplace; otherwise, there is a danger of injury andthe partition net could be damaged.◀

With a normal cargo area1. Fold open the rear covers on the headliner.2. Pull the partition net out of the case by the

strap.3. Insert the bars upwards into the brackets

on either side of the headliner and push

forwards. This is best performed from therear seat.

If the partition net is no longer needed: pro‐ceed in reverse order.

With an enlarged cargo area1. Fold down the entire rear seat backrest.2. Press the button, arrow 1, to unlock the

case on both sides.

3. Pull the case up and out of the two sidebrackets, arrow 2. Make sure not to tilt it inthe process.

4. Slide the case all the way into the guides,arrows 1, on the backs of the backrests.

Seite 157



5. Fold open the front covers on the head‐liner.

6. Quickly pull out the partition net and insertit into the brackets as for a normal cargoarea, refer to page 157. If the partition netbecomes blocked when it is pulled out, al‐low it to retract and then pull it out quicklyagain.

If the partition net is no longer needed: pressand hold button, arrow 1, and push the parti‐tion net back, arrow 2.

Finally, slide the case into the two brackets onthe sides from above, until it engages. The redwarning fields disappear.

Seite 158



Storage compartmentsVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

NotesNo loose objects in the passenger com‐partment

Do not stow any objects in the passengercompartment without securing them; other‐wise, they may present a danger to occupantsfor instance during braking and avoidance ma‐neuvers.◀

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐board

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.The mat materials could damage the dash‐board.◀

Storage compartmentsThe following storage compartments are avail‐able in the vehicle interior:▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger

side, refer to page 159.▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,

refer to page 160.▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage

compartment, in front of the cupholders,refer to page 160.

▷ Storage compartment in the front centerarmrest, refer to page 160.

▷ Compartments in the doors, refer topage 160.

▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.▷ Storage compartment in the rear center

console, refer to page 161.

Glove compartmentFront passenger side

NoteClose the glove compartment again im‐mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐cur during accidents.◀

Opening

Pull the handle.The light in the glove compartment switcheson.The net in the glove compartment is providedfor stowing the storage tray for the cupholder,refer to page 161.

ClosingFold cover closed.

Seite 159

Storage compartments Controls


LockingThe glove compartment can be locked with anintegrated key. This prevents access to theglove compartment.After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐mote control can be handed over, such as at ahotel, without the integrated key.

Driver's side

NoteClose the glove compartment again im‐mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐cur during accidents.◀

Opening

Pull the handle.

ClosingFold cover closed.

Front storage compartment

Raise the lid to open it.

Compartments in the doorsDo not stow any breakable objectsDo not store any breakable objects, e. g.

glass bottles, in the compartments, or there isan increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐cident.◀

Center armrestFrontA storage compartment is located in the centerarmrest between the front seats.

Opening

Fold the center armrest up.

RepositioningCenter armrest can be pushed forwards orbackwards. It engages in the end positions.

Seite 160

Controls Storage compartments


Connection for an external audiodevice

An external audio device, e.g.,an MP3 player, can be con‐nected via the AUX-IN port orthe USB audio interface in thecenter armrest.

Storage compartment in therearA storage compartment is located in the centerarmrest.

CupholdersHints

Shatter-proof containers and no hotdrinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and donot transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there isthe increased danger of injury in an accident.◀

Unsuitable containersDo not forcefully push unsuitable con‐

tainers into the cupholders. This may result indamage.◀

Front

Storage tray for front cupholdersThe cupholder with the storage tray can beused for additional storage. To do this, placethe storage tray in the cupholder.Only use the storage tray for small objects,such as keys or the remote control.When not in use, stow the storage tray in theglove compartment net. Insert the storage trayinto the net so that the top surface faces up.Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray.

RearIn the center armrest.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.To open: press the button.To close: push both covers back in, one afterthe other.

Pushing back the coversPush back the covers before folding up

the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholdercould become damaged.◀

Clothes hooksThe clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐dles in the rear.

Do not obstruct viewWhen suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐er's vision.◀

Seite 161



No heavy objectsDo not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a dangerto passengers during braking and evasive ma‐neuvers.◀

Storage compartments in thecargo areaNetSmall objects can be stowed in the nets on theleft and right sides.

Hooks/multi-function hook

A multi-function hook is located on each sideof the cargo area.The multi-function hooks can be loaded up toa max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.

Light and suitable objects onlyOnly hang light bags or suitable objects

from the holders. Otherwise, there is a dangerof objects flying about during braking and eva‐sive maneuvers.Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if ithas been appropriately secured.◀

Retaining strapA retaining strap is available on the right sidetrim for fastening small objects.

Lashing eyes in the cargo areaTo secure the cargo, refer to page 172, thereare four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Adaptive retaining system

At a glanceThe adaptive retaining system serves to subdi‐vide the cargo area. It consists of two bracketswith a telescopic rail and a retaining strap.

Do not fold the rear seat backrests downFold the rear seat backrest up and hook

the partition net into place before using theadaptive retaining system, otherwise the trans‐ported cargo could be thrown into the vehicleinterior in the event of an accident.◀

1 Bracket2 Telescopic rail3 Retaining strap4 Fixing point for retaining strap5 Fixing points for bracket

Insert the bracketPress the bracket into the retaining point untilit clicks into place.

Secure the cargoThe cargo may be secured in the followingways:▷ Between the rear seat backrest and the

telescopic rail.

Seite 162



▷ Between the telescopic rail and the retain‐ing strap.

Securing the cargo between the telescopic railand the retaining strap:

1. Place the cargo against the telescopic rail.2. Press button 1 and pass the retaining strap

around the cargo, arrow 2.

3. Hook the retaining strap into the fixingpoint.

4. Press button 1 to tighten the retainingstrap.

To secure larger loads, the retaining straps canalso be interlocked with one another.

Removing the brackets

Pull the bracket vertically out of the fixingpoint.

Stowing the adaptive retaining systemIf the adaptive retaining system is not needed,it can be stowed under the narrow cargo floorcover. Use the tension straps to secure it morefirmly.

Floor netThe floor net can also be used to Secure theload, refer to page 172, and to store smallparts.

Storage compartment under cargofloor panel

Maximum loadTo avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/20 kg in the storage compartment under thecargo floor panel.◀

Raise the cargo floor panel.

Partitioning the compartmentThe compartment can be divided using an at‐tachable partition.

Storage compartment, narrow

Raise the cargo floor panel. The storage com‐partment can be used e.g., for stowing thecargo cover or the adaptive retaining system.

Seite 163



Reversible floor panelThe underside of the large cargo floor panel iscoated with a water- and dirt-repellent finish.Fold the cargo floor panel up, remove it and flipit over.

Seite 164



Seite 165



Driving tipsThis chapter provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving andoperating modes.


Things to remember when drivingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Breaking-in periodGeneral informationMoving parts need to be broken in to adjust toeach other.The following instructions will help achieve along vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differentialAlways obey the official speed limit.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDo not exceed the maximum engine and roadspeed:▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and

93 mph/150 km/h.Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can gradually beincreased.

TiresDue to technical factors associated with theirmanufacture, tires do not achieve their fulltraction potential until after an initial breaking-in period.

Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimizedcontact and wear patterns between brakediscs and brake pads. Drive moderately duringthis break-in period.

ClutchThe function of the clutch reaches its optimallevel only after a distance driven of approx.300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacementThe same breaking in procedures should beobserved if any of the components mentionedabove have to be renewed in the course of thevehicle's operating life.

General driving notesClosing the rear window and tailgate

Drive with the rear window and tailgateclosed

Only drive with the tailgate closed; otherwise,in the event of an accident or braking and eva‐sive maneuvers, passengers and other roadusers may be injured, and the vehicle may bedamaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ter the passenger compartment.◀

If driving with the tailgate open cannot beavoided:▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.▷ Drive moderately.

Seite 168

Driving tips Things to remember when driving


Hot exhaust systemHot exhaust systemHigh temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system.Do not remove the heat shields installed andnever apply undercoating to them. Make surethat flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hotexhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐sition mode, or when parked. Such contactcould lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ous personal injury as well as property dam‐age.Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,there is the danger of getting burned.◀

Diesel particulate filterThe diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐peratures.During the cleaning time of several minutes,the following may occur:▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less

smoothly.▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐

ing from the exhaust until shortly after theengine is shut down.

▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐sary to achieve the accustomed perform‐ance.

Mobile communication devices in thevehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve‐hicle

It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐side the vehicle without connecting them di‐rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, thevehicle electronics and mobile communicationdevices can interfere with each other. In addi‐tion, there is no assurance that the radiation

generated during transmission will be dis‐charged from the vehicle interior.◀

HydroplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water canform between the tires and road surface.This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ing. It is characterized by a partial or completeloss of contact between the tires and the roadsurface, ultimately undermining your ability tosteer and brake the vehicle.

HydroplaningWhen driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

Driving through waterAdhere to water depth and speed limita‐tions

Do not exceed this water depth and walkingspeed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, theelectrical systems and the transmission maybe damaged.◀

Drive through calm water only and only if it isnot deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at thisheight, no faster than walking speed, up to6 mph/10 km/h.

Braking safelyYour vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ard feature.Applying the brakes fully is the most effectiveway of braking in situations when this is neces‐sary.The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with aminimum of steering effort.Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds fromthe hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in itsactive mode.

Seite 169

Things to remember when driving Driving tips


Objects within the range of movementof the pedals

No objects in the area around the pedalsKeep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;otherwise, the function of the pedals could beimpeded while driving and create the risk of anaccident.Do not place additional floor mats over existingmats or other objects.Only use floor mats that have been approvedfor the vehicle and can be properly fixed inplace.Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐tened again after they were removed for clean‐ing, for example.◀

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet coated with road salt orthere is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐sure on the brake pedal every few miles.Ensure that this action does not endangerother road users.The heat generated in this process helps drythe brake discs and pads.In this way braking efficiency will be availablewhen you need it.

HillsDrive long or steep downhill gradients in thegear in which the least braking is required.Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐ciency.You can increase the engine's braking effectby shifting down, going all the way to first gear,if necessary.

Avoid load on the brakesAvoid placing excessive load on the

brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wearand possibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutralDo not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐available with the engine stopped.◀

Brake disc corrosionThe corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐tamination on the brake pads are furthered by:▷ Low mileage.▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all.▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressurethat must be exerted by the pads during brakeapplications to clean the discs is not reached.Should corrosion form on the brake discs, thebrakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parkedvehicleWhen using the automatic climate control,condensation water develops that exits under‐neath the vehicle.Traces of water under the vehicle like this arenormal.

Seite 170

Driving tips Things to remember when driving


LoadingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

HintsOverloading the vehicleTo avoid exceeding the approved carry‐

ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating andincreases the rate at which damage developsinside the tires. This could result in a suddenloss of tire inflation pressure.◀

No fluids in the trunkMake sure that fluids do not leak into the

trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐aged.◀

Heavy and hard objectsDo not stow any heavy and hard objects

in the passenger compartment without secur‐ing them; otherwise, they may present a dan‐ger to occupants, e.g., during braking and eva‐sive maneuvers.◀

Determining the load limit1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐

hicle’s placard:▷ The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed XXX kgor YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the

vehicle and unstable driving situationsmay result.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orYYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity.For example, if the YYY amount equals1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbspassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacityis 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

Seite 171

Loading Driving tips


Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight ofthe occupants and the cargo.The greater the weight of the occupants, theless cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐

ble, directly behind and at the bottom ofthe rear passenger seat backrests.

▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is notoccupied, secure each of the outer safetybelts in the opposite buckle.

▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backreststo stow cargo.

▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge ofthe backrests.

▷ Use the cargo area partition net, refer topage 157, to protect passengers. Makesure that objects cannot penetrate thecargo area partition net.

Securing cargoLashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo there are four lashingeyes in the cargo area.

Securing cargo▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐

taining straps or draw straps.▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with

cargo straps.Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps ordraw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargoarea.

Securing cargoStow and secure the cargo as described

above; otherwise it may present a danger tothe occupants, e.g., during braking and avoid‐ance maneuvers.◀

Roof-mounted luggage rackNoteInstallation only possible with roof rack.Roof racks are available as special accessories.

SecuringFollow the installation instructions of the roofrack.

Seite 172

Driving tips Loading


LoadingBe sure that adequate clearance is maintainedfor tilting and opening the glass sunroof.Because roof racks raise the vehicle's centerof gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐sponse.Therefore, note the following when loadingand driving:▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicleweight.

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.▷ The roof load should not be too large in

area.▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom.▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie

with ratchet straps.▷ Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate.▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐

ation and braking maneuvers. Take cornersgently.

Seite 173

Loading Driving tips


Saving fuelVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

General informationYour vehicle contains advanced technology forthe reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐sions.Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ferent factors.The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ing style and regular maintenance can have aninfluence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐ronmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargoAdditional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached partsfollowing useRemove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggageracks which are no longer required followinguse.Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glasssunroofDriving with the glass sunroof and windowsopen results in increased air resistance andthereby reduces the range.

TiresGeneral informationTires can affect fuel consumption values invarious ways, for instance fuel consumptioncan be influenced by the size of the tires.

Check the tire inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐tion pressure at least twice a month and beforestarting on a long trip.Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐sistance and thus raises fuel consumption andtire wear.

Drive away immediatelyDo not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary. Start drivingright away, but at moderate engine speeds.This is the fastest way for the cold engine toreach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead whendrivingAvoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐cle driving ahead of you.Driving smoothly and looking ahead reducesfuel consumption.

Seite 174

Driving tips Saving fuel


Avoid high engine speedsUse 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly.When accelerating, shift up before reachinghigh engine speeds.When you reach the desired speed, shift intothe highest applicable gear and drive with theengine speed as low as possible and at a con‐stant speed.As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowersfuel consumption and reduces wear.The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indi‐cates the most fuel efficient gear.

Use coastingWhen approaching a red light, take your footoff the accelerator and let the vehicle coast toa halt.On a downhill gradient, take your foot off theaccelerator and let the vehicle roll.The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine duringlonger stopsSwitch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in trafficcongestion.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicleautomatically switches off the engine during astop.If the engine is switched off and then restartedrather than leaving the engine running con‐stantly, fuel consumption and emissions arereduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐onds of switching off the engine.In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐mined by other factors, such as driving style,

road conditions, maintenance or environmentalfactors.

Switch off any functions thatare not currently neededFunctions such as seat heating and the rearwindow defroster require a lot of energy andreduce the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.Therefore, switch off these functions if theyare not actually needed.The ECO PRO driving program supports theenergy conserving use of comfort functions.These functions are automatically deactivatedpartially or completely.

Have maintenance carriedoutHave vehicles maintained regularly to achieveoptimal vehicle economy and operating life.The maintenance should be carried out byyour service center.Also note the BMW Maintenance System, referto page 205.

ECO PROThe conceptECO PRO supports a driving style that saveson fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐gine control and comfort functions, e. g. theclimate control output, are adjusted.Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐matically decoupled from the transmission inthe D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐duce fuel consumption. Selector lever positionD remains engaged.

Seite 175

Saving fuel Driving tips


In addition, context-sensitive instructions canbe displayed that assist in driving in a mannerthat optimizes fuel consumption.In the instrument display, the extension of therange achieved by this can be displayed as abonus range.

At a glanceThe system includes the followingEfficientDynamics functions and displays:▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 176.▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to

page 177▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to

page 176.▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to

page 178.▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to

page 179.

Activate ECO PROPress button repeatedly until ECOPRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO

Via the Driving Dynamics Control1. Activate ECO PRO.2. "Configure ECO PRO"3. Configure the program.

Via the iDrive1. "Settings"2. "ECO PRO mode"Or

1. "Settings"2. "Driving mode"3. "Configure ECO PRO"Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip▷ "Tip at:":

Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PROTip is to be displayed.

▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PROspeed is exceeded.

CoastingFuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐ing the engine and Coasting, refer topage 178, with the engine idling.This function is only available in ECO PROmode.

ECO PRO climate control"ECO PRO climate control"The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐cient.By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating orcooling of the passenger compartment, fuelconsumption can be economized.The outputs of the seat heater and the exteriormirror heating are also reduced.The exterior mirror heating is made availablewhen outside temperatures are very cold.

ECO PRO potentialThe percentage of potential savings that canbe achieved with the current configuration isdisplayed.

Display in the instrument cluster

ECO PRO bonus rangeAn extension of the range canbe achieved by an adjusted driv‐ing style.This may be displayed as thebonus range in the instrument

cluster.

Seite 176



The bonus range is shown in the range display.The bonus range is automatically reset everytime the vehicle is refueled.

Driving style

In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐dicates the current efficiency of the drivingstyle.Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display forenergy recovered by coasting or when braking.Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: displaywhen accelerating.The efficiency of the driving style is shown bythe color of the bar:▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long

as the mark moves within the blue range.▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by

backing off the accelerator pedal.The display switches to blue as soon as allconditions for fuel-economy-optimized drivingare met.

ECO PRO Tip - driving instructionThe arrow indicates that thedriving style can be adjusted tobe more fuel efficient by backingoff the accelerator for instance.

NoteThe driving style display and ECO PRO tips inthe instrument cluster appear when the ECOPRO display is activated.

Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:

1. "Settings"2. "Instr. cluster display"3. "ECO PRO Info"

ECO PRO tip - SymbolsAn additional symbol and a text instruction aredisplayed.

Symbol Measure

For efficient driving style, back offthe accelerator or delay acceleratingto allow time to assess road condi‐tions.

Reduce speed to the selected ECOPRO speed.

Automatic transmission: switchfrom M/S to D and avoid manualshift interventions.

Manual shift transmission: followshifting instructions.

Manual shift transmission: engageneutral for engine stop.

Indications on the Control Display

EfficientDynamicsInformation on fuel consumption and technol‐ogy can be displayed during driving.

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "EfficientDynamics"

Displaying fuel consumption historyThe average fuel consumption can be dis‐played within an adjustable time frame.Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐lected time frame.Trip interruptions are represented below thebar on the time axis.

Seite 177



"Consumption history"

Adjusting fuel consumption historytime frame

Select the symbol.

Resetting fuel consumption history1. Open "Options".2. "Reset consumption history"

Displaying EfficientDynamics infoThe current efficiency can be displayed.

"EfficientDynamics info"The following systems are displayed:▷ Automatic engine Start/Stop function.▷ Energy recovery.▷ Climate control output.▷ Coasting.

Display ECO PRO tips "ECO PRO Tips"

The setting is stored for the profile currently inuse.

Coasting

The conceptThe system helps to conserve fuel.To do this, under certain conditions the engineis automatically decoupled from the transmis‐sion when selector lever position D is engaged.The vehicle continues traveling with the engineidling to reduce fuel consumption. Selectorlever position D remains engaged.This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ing.As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal isdepressed, the engine is automatically coupledto the transmission again.

HintsCoasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐fer to page 175, driving mode.Coasting is automatically activated when ECOPRO mode is called via the Driving DynamicsControl.The function is available in a certain speedrange.A forward-looking driving style helps the driverto use the function as often as possible andsupports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐ing.

Safety modeThe function is not available if one of the fol‐lowing conditions is satisfied.▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on

steep uphill or downhill grades.▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low

or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐sive current.

▷ Cruise control activated.

Functional requirementsIn ECO PRO mode, this function is available ina speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, ifthe following conditions are satisfied:▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not

operated.▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐

tion D.▷ Engine and transmission are at operating

temperature.

Seite 178



Display

Display in the instrument clusterThe mark in the bar display be‐low the tachometer is backlit inblue and is located at the zeropoint. The tachometer approxi‐mately indicates idle speed.

The coasting point indicator is illuminated atthe zero point during coasting.

Indications on the Control DisplayThe Coasting driving condition is displayed inEfficientDynamics Info while this driving modeis active.The distance traveled in the Coasting drivingcondition is indicated by a counter.

Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:driving condition Coasting.

Displaying EfficientDynamics info1. "Vehicle Info"2. "EfficientDynamics"3. "EfficientDynamics info"

Deactivating the system manuallyThe function can be deactivated in the Config‐ure ECO PRO, refer to page 176, menu, e.g., touse the braking effect of the engine when trav‐eling downhill.The setting is stored for the profile currently inuse.

ECO PRO driving style analysis

The conceptThe system helps in this situation to developan especially efficient driving style and to con‐serve fuel.For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.The assessment is done in various categoriesand is displayed on the Control Display.Using this indication, the individual drivingstyle can be oriented toward conserving fuel.The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.The range of the vehicle can be extended byan efficient driving style.This gain in range is displayed as a bonusrange in the instrument cluster and on theControl Display.

Functional requirementThe function is only available in ECO PROmode.

Calling up ECO PRO driving styleanalysis

Via the Driving Dynamics Control1. Activate ECO PRO.2. "EfficientDynamics"3. Select the symbol.

Display


Seite 179



The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐ysis consists of a symbolized road route and alookup table.The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐ing style. The more efficient the driving style,the smoother the depicted road route be‐comes, arrow 1.The table of values contains stars. The moreefficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐cluded in the table and the faster the bonusrange increases, arrow 2.If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐cient, a wavy road and a reduced number ofstars is displayed.To assist with an efficient driving style, ECOPRO tips are displayed during the drive.Tips about the energy saving driving style,Conserving fuel, refer to page 174.

Seite 180



Seite 181



MobilityIn order to always ensure your mobility, you will

find important information on operating fluids,wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside

Assistance in the following.


RefuelingVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

HintsRefuel promptlyRefuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine isnot ensured and damage may occur.◀

Diesel enginesThe filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐sel fuel pumps.

Fuel capOpening1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attachedto the fuel filler flap.

Closing1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strapDo not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot beclosed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flapIn the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐ample.

Seite 184

Mobility Refueling


1. Raise the cargo floor panel.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pumpsymbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following whenrefuelingThe fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicksoff the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tankDo not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise

fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐ment and damaging the vehicle.◀

Handling fuelsObey safety regulations posted at the

gas station.◀

Seite 185

Refueling Mobility


FuelVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Fuel recommendationNote

General fuel qualityEven fuels that conform to the specifica‐

tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐gine problems, for instance poor engine start‐ing behavior, poor handling and/orperformance. Switch gas stations or use abrand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀

GasolineFor the best fuel economy, the gasoline shouldbe sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐taining metal must not be used.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐out metallic additives.

Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese oriron, or permanent damage to the catalyticconverter and other components.◀

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.Ethanol should satisfy the following qualitystandards:US: ASTM 4806–xxCAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: comply with the current standard in eachcase.

Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐age of ethanol

Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐centage than recommended or one with othertypes of alcohol, i.e. no Flex Fuel, otherwisethis could damage the engine and fuel supplysystem.◀

Recommended fuel gradeBMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel gradeBMW recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel gradeDo not use any gasoline below the mini‐

mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐formance.◀

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ing, the engine may produce knocking soundswhen starting at high outside temperatures.This has no effect on the engine life.

Fuel qualityThe use of poor-quality fuels may result

in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ronmental conditions such as high ambienttemperature and high altitude, may occur.If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ommend switching to a high quality gasolinebrand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐gine deposits, it is highly recommended topurchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐ers.

Seite 186

Mobility Fuel


Failure to comply with these recommendationsmay result in the need for unscheduled main‐tenance.◀

Diesel

Low-Sulfur DieselThe engine of your BMW is designed for dieselwith low sulfur content:Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.xx: comply with the current standard in eachcase.

Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must

not exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not usegasoline. If you do fill the tank with the wrongfuel, e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine asthis may damage the engine.◀

After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐ice center or roadside assistance.If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the fillerpipe of your BMW, please check to ensure thatyou are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that isequipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle.In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuelcannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck,please contact BMW Roadside Assistance forinstructions on how to add fuel. For more infor‐mation on BMW Roadside Assistance, refer topage 220.

Winter dieselTo ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐erational in the winter, use winter diesel.It is available at gas stations during wintermonths.The fuel filter heating system, included as astandard feature, prevents disruption of thefuel supply while driving.

Do not add any diesel additivesDo not add additives, including gasoline;

otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀

BMW Advanced DieselThe conceptBMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐ides in the diesel emissions by injecting dieselexhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaustsystem. A chemical reaction takes place insidethe catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogenoxides.The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled.To be able to start the engine as usual, theremust be an adequate reducing agent.Reducing agent is added by the service center.

Warming up the systemIn order to warm the engine up to its operatingtemperature after a cold start, the automatictransmission may subsequently shift up to thenext higher gear.


Reserve displayThis display in the instrument cluster providesinformation about the distance that can still bedriven with the current reserve level.

The reserve display is shownstarting at a remaining range ofapprox. 1,000 miles/1,600 km.

Seite 187

Fuel Mobility


Refill in good timeThe reducing agent must be replenished

as soon as the Reserve display appears, other‐wise the engine cannot be restarted.◀

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimumThe engine will continue to runeven when the display shows --,as long as it is not switched offand all other operating condi‐tions are satisfied, sufficient fuel

for example.

Engine does not startDo not continue driving to the limit of the

remaining travel distance. Otherwise, you willnot be able to restart the engine after switch‐ing it off.◀

MisfuelingA Check Control message is displayed whenan incorrect fluid is added.After adding the wrong fluid, contact yourservice center.

System defectA Check Control message is displayed whenthere is a system defect.

Have the diesel exhaust fluidreplenishedThe reducing agent is added by the servicecenter within the context of regular mainte‐nance.It may be necessary to have the fluid replen‐ished several times under particular circum‐stances, for example, if the vehicle is driven ina particularly sporty style or if it is driven athigh altitudes.The reducing agent must be replenished assoon as the reserve display appears in the in‐strument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐start the engine.

Diesel exhaust fluid at lowtemperaturesDue to its physical properties, it is possiblethat the reducing agent may also need to bereplenished between regular maintenance ap‐pointments if it is exposed to temperatures un‐der + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add reducingagent only immediately before starting to drive.The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re‐serve display in the instrument cluster.At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃ the filllevel in some cases cannot be measured.After adding reducing agent, the reserve dis‐play is displayed only until the fill level can bemeasured again.

Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluidyourself in exceptional casesYou can replenish reducing agent yourself inexceptional cases, e.g., to get to the servicecenter.

Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluidDo not come into contact with the reduc‐

ing agent. Otherwise, skin or eye irritationsmay result.◀

Handling Diesel exhaust fluidWhen working with reducing agent in

closed spaces, ensure good ventilation. Whenthe bottle or container is opened, acrid smell‐ing fumes may escape.◀

Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reachof children

Keep reducing agent out of reach of children◀

Avoid contact with surfacesAvoid contact of reducing agent with sur‐

faces of the vehicle. Damage could result.◀

Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid▷ Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. With

this bottle and its special adapter, Diesel

Seite 188

Mobility Fuel


exhaust fluid can be replenished simplyand safely.

▷ Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at yourService Center.

Refill quantityWhen the Reserve display starts, add at least 2bottles of reducing agent.This corresponds to approx. 1 gallon.

Tank for reducing agent

The tank for the reducing agent is located nextto the fuel tank.

Adding the reducing agentAdd the reducing agent when the ignition isswitched on.

1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 184.2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and re‐

move.3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it

will go, see arrow.

4. Press the bottle down, see arrow.

The vehicle tank will be filled.The tank is full when the fill level in the bot‐tle no longer changes. It is not possible tooverfill.

5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐screw it.

6. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise.7. Close the fuel filler flap.

After adding Diesel exhaust fluid

NoteIncorrect fluidsAfter filling with incorrect fluids, such as

antifreeze for washer water, do not start theengine, otherwise there is risk of fire.◀

Contact your service center.

Disposing of bottlesYou take your empty Diesel exhaustfluid bottles to your Service Center fordisposal.

Seite 189

Fuel Mobility


Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐hold waste unless this is permitted by localregulations.

Reserve displayThe Reserve display will still ap‐pear along with the remainingrange after refilling.Engine can be started.After several minutes of driving,

the Reserve indication goes out.

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimumAfter filling, the indication -- isstill displayed.Only after the display goes outcan the engine -- be started.

1. Switch on the ignition.Display -- goes out after approx. 1 minute.

2. Engine can be started.

Seite 190

Mobility Fuel


Wheels and tiresVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Tire inflation pressureSafety informationThe tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐sure influence the following:▷ The service life of the tires.▷ Road safety.▷ Driving comfort.

Checking the pressureTires have a natural, consistent loss of pres‐sure.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularlyRegularly check the tire inflation pres‐

sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice amonth and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐serve this precaution, you may be driving ontires with incorrect tire pressures, a conditionthat may not only compromise your vehicle'sdriving stability, but also lead to tire damageand the risk of an accident.◀

Tires heat up during driving, and the tire infla‐tion pressure increases along with the temper‐ature of the tire. The tire inflation pressurespecifications relate to cold tires or tires withthe ambient temperature.Only check the tire inflation pressure when thetires are cold. This means after driving no more

than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least 2 hours.The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1bar, 2 psi.For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tireinflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat TireMonitor.For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting thetire inflation pressure, reset the Tire PressureMonitor.

Pressure specificationsThe tire inflation pressure table, refer topage 192, contains all pressure specificationsfor the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐proved tire sizes and recommended tirebrands. This information can be obtained fromyour service center.To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,please note the following:▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to100 mph/160 km/hFor speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and foroptimum driving comfort, note the pressurevalues in the tire inflation pressure table, referto page 192, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 191

Wheels and tires Mobility


These pressure values can also be found onthe tire inflation pressure label on the driver'sdoor pillar.

Maximum permissible speedDo not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐

wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀

Tire inflation pressure values up to100 mph/160 km/h

328i, 328i xDrive, 328d, 328d xDrive

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

225/50 R 17 94 VM+S A/S RSC225/50 R 17 94 HM+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

225/45 R 18 91 VM+S A/S RSC225/45 R 18 91 YRSC225/45 R 18 95 VM+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39

Front: 225/50 R 1794 W RSCRear: 255/45 R 1798 W RSC

2.2 / 32-

-2.4 / 35


Front: 225/45 R 1891 Y RSCRear: 255/40 R 1895 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.4 / 35


2.2 / 32-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 225/35 R 2090 Y XL RSCRear: 255/30 R 2092 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36-

-3.0 / 44

Compact wheelT 135/80 R 17 102M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

Tire inflation pressures at max.speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/hIn order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures forspeeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from therelevant table on the following pages. Other‐wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀

Tire inflation pressure values over100 mph/160 km/h

328i, 328i xDrive, 328d, 328d xDriveWithout high-speed tuning feature

Seite 192

Mobility Wheels and tires




225/50 R 17 94 VM+S A/S RSC225/50 R 17 94 HM+S RSC

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

225/45 R 18 91 VM+S A/S RSC225/45 R 18 91 YRSC225/45 R 18 95 VM+S XL RSC

2.9 /42 3.4 / 49


2.7 / 39-

-2.9 /42


2.9 /42-

-2.9 /42


2.7 / 39-

-3.2 / 46


2.9 /42-

-3.4 / 49



With high-speed tuning feature



225/50 R 17 94 HM+S RSC

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

225/45 R 18 91 YRSC225/45 R 18 95 VM+S XL RSC

2.9 /42 3.4 / 49


2.7 / 39-

-2.9 /42


2.9 /42-

-2.9 /42


2.7 / 39-

-3.2 / 46


2.9 /42-

-3.4 / 49



Tire identification marksTire size245/45 R 18 96 Y245: nominal width in mm

Seite 193



45: aspect ratio in %R: radial tire code18: rim diameter in inches96: load rating, not for ZR tiresY: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letterQ = up to 100 mph, 160 km/hR = up to 106 mph, 170 km/hS = up to 112 mph, 180 km/hT = up to 118 mph, 190 km/hH = up to 131 mph, 210 km/hV = up to 150 mph, 240 km/hW = up to 167 mph, 270 km/hY = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberDOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0814xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brandxxx: tire size and tire design0814: tire ageTires with DOT codes meet the guidelines ofthe U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire ageDOT … 0814: the tire was manufactured in the8th week of 2014.

RecommendationRegardless of wear, replace tires at least every6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;Temperature A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwearTraction AA A B CTemperature A B CAll passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐eral Safety Requirements in addition to thesegrades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,times as well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may depart signifi‐cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ing habits, service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction performance.The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest, B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead to

Seite 194



sudden tire failure. The grade C correspondsto a level of performance which all passengercar tires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades BandA represent higher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐quired by law.

Temperature grade for this tireThe temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀

RSC – Run-flat tiresRun-flat tires, refer to page 197, are labeledwith a circular symbol containing the lettersRSC marked on the sidewall.

M+SWinter and all-season tires with better coldweather performance than summer tires.

Tire treadSummer tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.12 in/3 mm.There is an increased danger of hydroplaning ifthe tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.16 in/4 mm.Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires areless suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around thetire's circumference and have the legally re‐quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire withTWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damageGeneral informationInspect your tires often for damage, foreignobjects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

NotesDriving over rough or damaged road surfaces,as well as debris, curbs and other obstaclescan cause serious damage to wheels, tires andsuspension parts. This is more likely to occurwith low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ioning between the wheel and the road. Becareful to avoid road hazards and reduce yourspeed, especially if your vehicle is equippedwith low-profile tires.Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐fects:▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

dency to pull to the left or right.Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving overcurbs, road damage, or similar things.

Seite 195



In case of tire damageIf there are indications of tire damage, re‐

duce your speed immediately and have thewheels and tires checked right away; other‐wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.Drive carefully to the nearest service center.Have the vehicle towed or transported there.Otherwise, tire damage can become life threat‐ening for vehicle occupants and also otherroad users.◀

Repair of tire damageFor safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not havedamaged tires repaired; they should be re‐placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐sult.◀

Changing wheels and tiresMounting

Information on mounting tiresHave mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combinationYou can ask the service center about the rightwheel/tire combination and wheel rim versionsfor the vehicle.Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impairthe function of a variety of systems such asABS or DSC.To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐figuration from a single manufacturer.Following tire damage, have the original wheeland tire combination remounted on the vehicleas soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tiresYou should only use wheels and tires

that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, forexample, despite having the same official sizeratings, variations can lead to body contact andwith it, the risk of severe accidentsThe manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐mine if they are suited for use, and thereforecannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐cle if they are mounted.◀

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐hicle recommends certain tire brands. Thesecan be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.With proper use, these tires meet the higheststandards for safety and handling.

New tiresDue to technical factors associated with theirmanufacture, tires do not achieve their fulltraction potential until after an initial breaking-in period.Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Seite 196



Retreaded tiresPossibly substantial variations in the de‐

sign and age of the tire casing structures canlimit service life and have a negative impact onroad safety.◀

Winter tiresWinter tires are recommended for operating onwinter roads.Although so-called all-season M+S tires doprovide better winter traction than summertires, they do not provide the same level of per‐formance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle is higherthan the permissible speed for the winter tires,then display a corresponding sign in the fieldof vision. You can obtain this sign from the tirespecialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tiresDo not exceed the maximum speed for

the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐age and accidents can occur.◀

Run-flat tiresIf you are already using run-flat tires, for yourown safety you should replace them only withthe same kind. No spare tire is available in thecase of a flat tire. Your service center will beglad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axlesDifferent wear patterns can occur on the frontand rear axles depending on individual drivingconditions. The tires can be rotated betweenthe axles to achieve even wear. Your servicecenter will be glad to advise you. After rotating,check the tire pressure and correct if neces‐sary.Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐cles with different tire sizes on the front and

rear axles, i.e. when using different types oftires.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible.Always protect tires against all contact with oil,grease and fuels.Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tiresLabel

RSC label on the tire sidewall.The wheels are composed of special rims andtires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐gree.The support of the sidewall allows the tire toremain drivable to a restricted degree in theevent of a pressure loss.

FTM: continued driving with a damaged tire,refer to page 103.TPM: continued driving with a damaged tire,refer to page 100.

Changing run-flat tiresFor your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Nospare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Seite 197



Snow chainsFine-link snow chainsOnly certain types of fine-link snow chainshave been tested by the manufacturer of thevehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.Information about the approved snow chainsare available from the service center.

UseUse only in pairs on the rear wheels, equippedwith the tires of the following size:▷ 205/60 R 16.▷ 225/55 R 16.▷ 225/50 R 17.▷ 225/45 R 18.Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.Make sure that the snow chains are alwayssufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.When driving with snow chains, briefly activateDynamic Traction Control if necessary.

Maximum speed with snow chainsDo not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/hwhen using snow chains.

Seite 198



Engine compartmentVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐


Important features in the engine compartment

1 Jump-starting, negative terminal2 Vehicle identification number3 Washer fluid reservoir4 Jump-starting, positive terminal5 Engine compartment fuse box

6 Oil filler neck7 Coolant reservoir

The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder anddiesel engines is located on the oppositeside of the engine compartment.

Seite 199

Engine compartment Mobility


HoodHints

Working in the engine compartmentNever attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without thenecessary professional technical training.If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐lines, have any work on the vehicle performedonly by a service center.If this work is not carried out properly, there isthe danger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

Never reach into the engine compart‐ment

Never reach into the intermediate spaces orgaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hotparts.◀

Fold down wiper armBefore opening the hood, ensure that the

wiper arms are against the windshield, or thismay result in damage.◀

Opening the hood1. Pull lever in the interior:

Engine is released, arrow 1.

2. After the lever is released, pull the leveragain:Hood can be opened, arrow 2.

Indicator/warning lampsWhen the hood is opened, a Check Controlmessage is displayed.

Closing the hood

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Hood open when drivingIf you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im‐mediately and close it securely.◀

Danger of pinchingMake sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Seite 200

Mobility Engine compartment


Engine oilVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

General informationThe engine oil consumption is dependent onthe driving style and driving conditions. Whena sporty driving style is used, the engine oilconsumption, for example, is clearly higher.Therefore, regularly check the engine oil levelafter refueling.Depending on its engine, the vehicle is equip‐ped with electronic oil measurement or meas‐uring is done with a dipstick.The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐uring principles.▷ Status display▷ Detailed measurement

Checking the oil levelelectronicallyStatus display

The conceptThe oil level is monitored electronically duringdriving and shown on the Control Display.If the oil level reaches the minimum level, acheck control message is displayed.

RequirementsA current measured value is available after ap‐prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shortertrip, the status of the last, sufficiently long tripis displayed.With frequent short-distance trips, regularlyperform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the oil level1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Engine oil level"

Oil level display messagesDifferent messages appear on the display de‐pending on the oil level. Pay attention to thesemessages.If the engine oil level is too low, within the next125 miles/200 km Add oil, refer to page 202.

Engine oil level too lowAdd oil immediately; otherwise, an insuf‐

ficient amount of engine oil could result in en‐gine damage.◀

Take care not to add too much engine oil.Too much engine oilHave the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐age.◀

Detailed measurement

The conceptIn the detailed measurement the oil level ischecked and displayed via a scale.During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐creased somewhat.

Seite 201

Engine oil Mobility


General informationA detailed measurement is only possible withcertain engines.

Requirements▷ Vehicle is on level road.▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral

position, clutch and accelerator pedals notdepressed.

▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever inselector lever position N or P and accelera‐tor pedal not depressed.

▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐perature.

Performing a detailed measurementIn order to perform a detailed measurement ofthe engine oil level:

1. "Vehicle Info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Measure engine oil level"4. "Start measurement"The oil level is checked and displayed via ascale.Duration: approx. 1 minute.

Adding engine oilGeneral informationSwitch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐cle before engine oil is added.

Filler neck

Only add 1 US quart/liter of oil when the mes‐sage is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Adding oilAdd oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

Otherwise, the engine may be damaged.◀

Do not add too much engine oilWhen too much engine oil is added, im‐

mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,this may cause engine damage.◀

Protect childrenKeep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐

dren and heed the warnings on the containersto prevent health risks.◀

Oil types for refillingHints

No oil additivesOil additives may lead to engine dam‐

age.◀

Viscosity grades for engine oilsWhen selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the viscositygrades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or enginedamage may occur.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life ofthe engine.

Seite 202

Mobility Engine oil


Approved oil typesYou can add oils with the following specifica‐tions:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Diesel engine

BMW Longlife-04.

Additional information about the approvedtypes of oils can be requested from the servicecenter.

Alternative oil typesIf the approved engine oils are not available, upto 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the followingspecification can be added:

Gasoline engine

API SM or superior grade specification.

Diesel engine

API ILSAC GF-5.

Engine oil change:The vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou let the service center change the motor oil.

Seite 203

Engine oil Mobility


CoolantVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

HintsDanger of burns from hot engineDo not open the cooling system while

the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolantmay cause burns.◀

Suitable additivesOnly use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives areharmful to your health.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.Not all commercially available additives aresuitable for the vehicle. Information about thesuitable additives are available from the servicecenter.

Coolant levelGeneral informationDepending on the engine installation, the cool‐ant reservoir may be located on the oppositeside of the engine compartment.

Checking1. Let the engine cool.2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐

tween the minimum and maximum marks.

The marks are on the side of the coolantreservoir.

Symbol Meaning

Maximum

Minimum

Adding1. Let the engine cool.2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir

slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐cess pressure to dissipate, and then openit.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant upto the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.The arrows on the coolant reservoir andthe cap must point towards one another.

5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐nated as soon as possible.

DisposalComply with the relevant environmen‐tal protection regulations when dispos‐ing of coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 204

Mobility Coolant


MaintenanceVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

BMW maintenance systemThe maintenance system indicates requiredmaintenance measures, and thereby providessupport in maintaining road safety and the op‐erational reliability of the vehicle.

Condition Based ServiceCBSSensors and special algorithms take into ac‐count the driving conditions of your vehicle.Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐mines the maintenance requirements.The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance you need to your userprofile.Detailed information on service requirements,refer to page 81, can be displayed on the Con‐trol Display.

Service data in the remote controlInformation on the required maintenance iscontinuously stored in the remote control.Your service center will read out this data andsuggest the right array of service proceduresfor your vehicle.Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐mote control with which the vehicle was drivenmost recently.

Storage periodsStorage periods during which the vehicle bat‐tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐count.If this occurs, have a service center update thetime-dependent maintenance procedures,such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet for USmodels and Warranty andService Guide Booklet forCanadian modelsPlease consult your Service and Warranty In‐formation Booklet for US models and Warrantyand Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐els for additional information on service re‐quirements.Maintenance and repair should be performedby your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ular maintenance procedures recorded in thevehicle's Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models, and in the Warrantyand Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐nance.

Socket for OBD OnboardDiagnosisNote

Socket for Onboard DiagnosisThe socket for onboard diagnostics may

only be used by the service center or a work‐shop that operates in accordance with thespecifications of the vehicle manufacturer with

Seite 205

Maintenance Mobility


correspondingly trained personnel and otherauthorized persons. Otherwise, use may resultin operating problems for the vehicle.◀

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side forchecking the primary components in the vehi‐cle emissions.

Emissions▷ The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Havethe vehicle checked as soon aspossible.Canadian model: warning light indi‐cates the engine symbol.

▷ The warning lamp flashes under certaincircumstances:This indicates that there is excessive mis‐firing in the engine.Reduce the vehicle speed and have thesystem checked immediately; otherwise,serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐riod can seriously damage emission con‐trol components, in particular the catalyticconverter.

Seite 206

Mobility Maintenance


Replacing componentsVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored underthe narrow cargo floor cover in the cargo area.To open, lift the floor cover.

Wiper blade replacementNote

Do not fold down the wipers withoutwiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper bladeshave not been installed; this may damage thewindshield.◀

Replacing the front wiper blades1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer

to page 69, the wiper arms.2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, andfold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.

4. Remove the wiper blade forward from thecatch.

5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse orderof removal until it locks in place.

6. Fold down the wipers.Folding down wipers before opening thehood

Before opening the hood, ensure that thewiper arms with the wiper blades are againstthe windshield to prevent damage.◀

Replace the rear wiper blade1. Lift the wiper up fully and pull off the wiper

blade, arrow.

2. Position the new wiper blade and press iton until it you hear it snap into place.

3. Fold the wipers in.

Seite 207

Replacing components Mobility


Lamp and bulb replacementHints

Lamps and bulbsLamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐tion to vehicle safety.The manufacturer of the vehicle recommendsthat you entrust corresponding procedures tothe service center if you are unfamiliar withthem or they are not described here.You can obtain a selection of replacementbulbs at the service center.

Danger of burnsOnly change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of gettingburned.◀

Working on the lighting systemWhen working on the lighting system,

you should always switch off the lights af‐fected to prevent short circuits.To avoid possible injury or equipment damagewhen replacing bulbs, observe any instructionsprovided by the bulb manufacturer.◀

Do not perform work/bulb replacementon xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system,including bulb replacement, performed only bya service center. Due to the high voltagepresent in the system, there is the danger offatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀

Do not touch the bulbsDo not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts ofcontamination will burn into the bulb's surfaceand reduce its service life.Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,or hold the bulb by its base.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)Some items of equipment use light-emittingdiodes installed behind a cover as a lightsource.These light-emitting diodes, which are relatedto conventional lasers, are officially designatedas Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the coversDo not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

Headlamp glassCondensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. Whendriving with the light switched on, the conden‐sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐lamp glasses do not need to be changed.If the headlamps do not dim despite drivingwith the light switched on, increasing humidityforms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have theservice center check this.

Headlamp settingThe headlamp adjustments can be affected bychanging lamps and bulbs. Therefore after achange, have the headlamp setting checkedand corrected by Service.

Seite 208

Mobility Replacing components


Front lamps, bulb replacement

Halogen headlamps

Headlamps

1 Parking lamps2 High beams/headlamp flasher3 Low beams4 Turn signal5 Daytime running lights

Accessing the turn signals and low beamsFollow general instructions, refer to page 208.

In the wheel house, loosen the two bracketsand remove the cover.

Turn signal21-watt bulb, PY21W

1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of thewheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulbholder counterclockwise and remove.

2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turncounterclockwise and remove.

3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐verse order of removal.

4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.

Seite 209



Low beams55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐move.

2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen itfrom the holder and remove.

3. Pull the connector off the bulb.4. Attach the connector to the new bulb.5. First insert the bulb at the top with the

strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps intoplace.

6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.Make sure that the cap engages.


Accessing the daytime running lights, highbeams/headlamp flasher and parkinglampsFollow general instructions, refer to page 208.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 200.2. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐

move.

Parking lamps6-watt bulb, H6W.

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise andremove.


3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceedin reverse order of removal. Make sure thatthe bulb holder snaps into place.


Seite 210



High beams/headlamp flasher55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen itfrom the holder and remove.

2. Pull the connector off the bulb.3. Attach the connector to the new bulb.4. First insert the bulb at the top with the

strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps intoplace.


Daytime running lights24-watt bulb, PW24W.

1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulbconnector.

2. Remove the bulb holder.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse

order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐tom of the bulb holder must be facingdownward. Make sure that the bulb holdersnaps into place.

5. Attach the high beam bulb connector.6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.

Make sure that the cap engages.

Xenon headlamps

Xenon headlampsBecause of the long life of these bulbs, thelikelihood of failure is very low. Switching thelamps on and off frequently shortens their life.If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps andcontinue the trip with great care. Comply withlocal regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacementon xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system,including bulb replacement, performed only bya service center. Due to the high voltagepresent in the system, there is the danger offatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,please contact your BMW center.

Seite 211



Headlamps

1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher3 Turn signal

Low beams and high beams are designed withxenon technology.The parking lamps and daylight running lightsare made using LED technology.Contact your service center in the event of amalfunction.

Turn signalFollow general instructions, refer to page 208.

21-watt bulb, PY21W

1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ets and remove the cover.

2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of thewheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulbholder counterclockwise and remove.


4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐verse order of removal.


Front fog lampsFollow general instructions, refer to page 208.35-watt bulb, H8.

1. Use the handle of the screwdriver from theonboard vehicle tool kit to remove thethree wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.

Seite 212



Carefully pull back the wheel house panel,arrow 2.

2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.Turn the bulb, arrow 2.Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise.Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐wise.Remove the bulb.

3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connectorand screw on the wheel house panel.

Turn signal in exterior mirrorFollow general instructions, refer to page 208.The turn signals in the exterior mirrors featureLED technology. Contact your service centerin the event of a malfunction.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

1 Turn signal2 Reversing lamp3 Inside brake lamp4 Tail lamps5 Outside brake lamp

Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps

General informationFollow general instructions, refer to page 208.Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W.The tail lamps feature LED technology. Con‐tact your service center in the event of a mal‐function.

Use caution when replacing the bulbUse caution and proceed one step at a

time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐age to the tail lamps or vehicle.◀

Seite 213



Removing the exterior tail lamp1. Open the tailgate.2. Use a screwdriver out of the onboard vehi‐

cle tool kit to depress the catch fittings, ar‐rows, and take off the cover.

3. Loosen the two nuts with the screwdriverhandle, arrows.

4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp, ar‐row 1, and carefully pull it backward andout, arrow 2. Use your free hand to hold itin place in order to prevent the tail lampfrom coming loose suddenly. Make sure

that the foam rubber sealing ring is on thecentering pin.

5. Release the catch at the top on the con‐nector of the connecting line and removethe connector from the bulb holder.

Replacing the bulbs1. Loosen the five fasteners, arrows 1, on the

bulb holder and remove the bulb holderfrom the tail lamp, arrow 2.

2. Press the defective bulb gently into thesocket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert thenew bulb and attach the bulb holder. Makesure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐teners.

Installing the tail lamp1. Connect the connecting line to the tail

lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip.2. Make sure that the sealing ring is on the

centering pin and that it is not damaged.3. Position and firmly press the outer part of

the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐row 1, and the inner part onto the screws,

Seite 214



arrow 2. Make sure that the tail lamp en‐gages in the rubber mount.

4. Screw the two nuts tight and mount thecover.

Lamps in the tailgate

General informationFollow general instructions, refer to page 208.Reversing lamps: 16-watt bulb, PW16W.Inner brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, H21W

Accessing the lamps

Slide the cover outwards, arrow, and remove.

Replacing the reversing lamp and innerbrake lamp1. Loosen the two holders, arrow 1 and pull

down on the lamp holder to remove, ar‐row 2.

2. Unscrew the defective bulb of the revers‐ing or brake lamp from its socket counter‐clockwise.

3. Insert the new bulb.

Installing the bulb holder1. Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide

pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐row 2, into the connections, arrow 3.

2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure thatthe two exterior holders latch into place.

3. Place the cover back in position and slide itinwards.

Tail lamp, license plate lamp andcentral brake lampFollow general instructions, refer to page 208.These lamps are made using LED technology.Contact your service center in the event of amalfunction.

Seite 215



Changing wheelsHintsThe vehicle equipment does not include aspare tire.When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tiredoes not need to be changed immediately inthe event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.The tools for changing wheels are available asaccessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐cated at the positions shown.

Vehicle batteryMaintenanceThe battery is maintenance-free.The added amount of acid is sufficient for theservice life of the battery.Your service center will be glad to advise youon questions regarding the battery.

Battery replacementUse approved vehicle batteries onlyOnly use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged andsystems or functions may not be fully availa‐ble.◀

After a battery replacement, have the batteryregistered on the vehicle by your service cen‐ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fullyavailable and that any Check Control mes‐sages of these comfort functions are no longerdisplayed.

Charging the battery

NoteDo not connect charging devices to the12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle asthis may damage the vehicle battery due to anincreased power consumption.◀

General informationMake sure that the battery is always suffi‐ciently charged to guarantee that the batteryremains usable for its full service life.The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐lowing cases:▷ When making frequent short-distance

drives.▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐

riods, longer than a month.

Starting aid terminalsIn the vehicle, only charge the battery via thestarting aid terminals, refer to page 221, in theengine compartment with the engine off.

Power failureAfter a temporary power loss, some equipmentneeds to be reinitialized.Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐

tions again.▷ Time: update.▷ Date: update.

Seite 216



▷ Navigation system: wait for the operabilityof the navigation.

Disposing of old batteriesHave old batteries disposed of by yourservice center or bring them to a recy‐cling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position fortransport and storage. Secure the battery sothat it does not tip over during transport.

FusesHints

Replacing fusesNever attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐tute of another color or amperage rating; thiscould lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀

Plastic tweezers and information on the fusetypes and locations are stored in the fuse boxin the cargo area.

In the engine compartment1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen

the three cover screws, arrow 1.

2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.

3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.4. Press the four fasteners and remove the

cover.

Attaching the covers1. When attaching the cover, make sure that

all four fasteners are engaged.2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and

then thread it between the bars.

3. Press down on the holder and tighten thethree screws.

In the cargo area

Raise the cargo floor panel.

Seite 217



The fuses are located under a cover. To openthe cover, reach into the recessed grip and foldthe cover open.

Information on the fuse types and locations isfound on a separate sheet.

Seite 218



Breakdown assistanceVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located in the center console.

Intelligent EmergencyRequestRequirements▷ The radio ready state is switched on.▷ The Assist system is functional.▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has

been activated.

General informationOnly press the SOS button in an emergency.

HintsEmergency Request not guaranteedFor technical reasons, the Emergency

Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐able conditions.◀

Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the

button lights up.▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request

was initiated.If the situation allows, wait in your vehicleuntil the voice connection has been estab‐lished.

▷ The LED flashes when a connection to theBMW Response Center has been estab‐lished.When the emergency request is receivedat the BMW Response Center, the BMWResponse Center contacts you and takesfurther steps to help you.Even if you are unable to respond, theBMW Response Center can take furthersteps to help you under certain circum‐stances.For this purpose, data that are used to de‐termine the necessary rescue measures,such as the current position of the vehicle

Seite 219

Breakdown assistance Mobility


if it can be established, are transmitted tothe BMW Response Center.

▷ If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐sponse Center can no longer be heard viathe speaker, you can nevertheless still beheard for the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency RequestautomaticallyUnder certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐fication is not affected by pressing the SOSbutton.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.To open the catches, arrows, turn through 90°.Fold back the trim.

First aid kitNoteSome of the articles have a limited service life.Check the expiration dates of the contentsregularly and replace any expired itemspromptly.

Storage

The first aid kit is located behind the left-handcover in the cargo area.

Roadside AssistanceService availabilityRoadside Assistance can be reached aroundthe clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐down.

Roadside AssistanceThe Roadside Assistance phone number canbe viewed on the iDrive or a connection toRoadside Assistance can be established di‐rectly.For additional information, see user's manualfor Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐cation.

Jump-startingNotesIf the battery is discharged, an engine can bestarted using the battery of another vehicleand two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐bles with fully insulated clamp handles.To prevent personal injury or damage to bothvehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐dure.

Seite 220

Mobility Breakdown assistance


Do not touch live partsTo avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐

jury, always avoid all contact with electricalcomponents while the engine is running.◀

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐mation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehiclesMake sure that there is no contact be‐

tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀

Starting aid terminalsConnecting orderConnect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injuryfrom sparking.◀

The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐tive terminal.Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as thebattery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid

terminal.2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of thebattery, or to the corresponding startingaid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐tance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other endof the cable to the positive terminal of thebattery, or to the corresponding startingaid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negativejumper cable to the negative terminal ofthe battery, or to the corresponding engineor body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to thenegative terminal of the battery, or to thecorresponding engine or body ground ofthe vehicle to be started.

Starting the engineNever use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicleand let it run for several minutes at an in‐creased idle speed.If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐gine: let the engine of the assisting vehiclerun for approx. 10 minutes.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle beingstarted in the usual way.

Seite 221



If the first starting attempt is not success‐ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐other attempt in order to allow the dis‐charged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐

verse order.Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towingNote



Switching off Intelligent Safety systems, referto page 103.

Manual transmissionGearshift lever in neutral position.

TowingFollow the towing instructionsFollow all towing instructions; otherwise,

vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀

▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turnsignals, and windshield wipers may be un‐available.

▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axletilted, as the front wheels could turn.

▷ When the engine is stopped, there is nopower assist. Consequently, more forceneeds to be applied when braking andsteering.

▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐quired.

▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighterthan the vehicle being towed; otherwise,it will not be possible to control the vehicleresponse.

Tow truck

Your vehicle should be transported with a towtruck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicleDo not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Automatic transmission: transportingyour vehicle

NoteYour vehicle is not permitted to be towed.Therefore, contact a service center in theevent of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towedHave your vehicle transported on a load‐

ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐cur.◀

Seite 222



Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on aloading platform.

Do not lift the vehicleDo not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front formaneuvering the vehicle only.

Towing other vehicles

General informationLight towing vehicleThe towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it willnot be possible to control the vehicle re‐sponse.◀

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctlyAttach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts maycause damage.◀

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐pending on local regulations.

▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearlyidentify the vehicle being towed by placinga sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐dow.

Tow barThe tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mountingthe tow bar at an offset angle, please observethe following:▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during

cornering.▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is secured with an offset.

Tow ropeWhen starting to tow the vehicle, make surethat the tow rope is taut.To avoid jerking and the associated stresseson the vehicle components when towing, al‐ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctlyOnly secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it issecured on other parts of the vehicle.◀

Tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at thefront or rear of the BMW. It is stored in the on‐board vehicle tool kit under the narrow cargofloor cover in the cargo area. To open, lift thefloor cover.

Tow fitting, information on use▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in.▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.

Seite 223



▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and thevehicle can occur.◀

Screw thread

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover topush it out.

Tow-starting

Automatic transmissionDo not tow-start the vehicle.Due to the automatic transmission, the enginecannot be started by tow-starting.Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐edied.

Manual transmissionIf possible, do not tow-start the vehicle butstart the engine by jump-starting, refer topage 220. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐gine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system andcomply with local regulations.

2. Ignition, refer to page 62, on.3. Engage third gear.4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch pedal pressed and slowly releasethe pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐ately press on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the towbar or rope, and switch off the hazardwarning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 224



CareVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ment is also described that is not available in avehicle, e. g., because of the selected optionalequipment or country variant. This also appliesfor safety-related functions and systems.

Car washesHints

Steam jets or high-pressure washersWhen using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance awayand use a maximum temperature of140 ℉/60 ℃.If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that adistance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐sively high pressures or temperatures cancause damage or preliminary damage that maythen lead to long-term damage.Follow the user's manual for the high-pressurewasher.◀

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do notspray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,Park Distance Control, for extended periods oftime and only from a distance of at least12 in/30 cm.◀

▷ Regularly remove foreign items such asleaves in the area below the windshieldwhen the hood is raised.

▷ Wash your vehicle frequently, particularlyin winter.

Intense soiling and road salt can damagethe vehicle.

Automatic car washes

Hints▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or

those that use soft brushes in order toavoid paint damage.

▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are notdamaged by the transport mechanisms.

▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, theymay be damaged, depending on the widthof the vehicle.

▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer topage 68, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐vation.

▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm canbe triggered by the interior motion sensorof the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,refer to page 43.

Guide rails in car washesAvoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle bodycould be damaged.◀

Before driving into a car washIn order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in acar wash, take the following steps:Manual transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash.2. Shift to neutral.3. Switch the engine off.4. Switch on the ignition.Automatic transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash.

Seite 225

Care Mobility


2. Engage selector lever position N.3. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switchedon, and a Check-Control message is dis‐played.

Do not turn off the ignition in the carwash

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash;otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐gaged and damages can result.◀

To start the engine:

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press the Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ping on the brake turns the ignition off.The vehicle cannot be locked from the outsidewhen in selector lever position N. A signal issounded when an attempt is made to lock thevehicle.

Selector lever positionSelector lever position P is engaged automati‐cally:▷ When the ignition is switched off.▷ After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlamps▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

caustic cleansers.▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due

to insects, with shampoo and wash off withwater.

▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use anice scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking actioncan be reduced and corrosion of the brakediscs can occur.

Completely remove all residues on the win‐dows, to minimize loss of visibility due tosmearing and to reduce wiper noises andwiper blade wear.

Vehicle careCar care productsBMW recommends using cleaning and careproducts from BMW, since these have beentested and approved.

Car care and cleaning productsFollow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors orwindows.Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐cles.Cleansers can contain substances that aredangerous and harmful to your health.◀

Vehicle paintRegular care contributes to driving safety andvalue retention. Environmental influences inareas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐quency and extent of your car care to theseinfluences.Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel,oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removedimmediately to prevent the finish from beingaltered or discolored.

Leather careRemove dust from the leather often, using acloth or vacuum cleaner.Otherwise, particles of dust and road grimechafe in pores and folds, and lead to increasedwear and premature degradation of the leathersurface.

Seite 226

Mobility Care


To guard against discoloration, such as fromclothing, provide leather care roughly everytwo months.Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐cause soiling on such surfaces is substantiallymore visible.Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt andgrease will gradually break down the protectivelayer of the leather surface.Suitable care products are available from theservice center.

Upholstery material careVacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, usea soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐ble interior cleaner.Clean the upholstery down to the seams usinglarge sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing thematerial vigorously.

Damage from Velcro® fastenersOpen Velcro® fasteners on pants or

other articles of clothing can damage the seatcovers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners areclosed.◀

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the vehicle, use only neutralwheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steamjets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐turer's instructions.Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agentscan destroy the protective layer of adjacentcomponents, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean components such as the radia‐tor grille or door handles with an ample supplyof water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐

ularly when they have been exposed to roadsalt.

Rubber componentsAside from water, treat only with rubbercleansers.When cleaning rubber seals, do not use anysilicon-containing car care products in order toavoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood partsClean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with asoft cloth.

Plastic componentsThese include:▷ Imitation leather surfaces.▷ Headliner.▷ Lamp lenses.▷ Instrument cluster cover.▷ Matte black spray-coated components.▷ Painted parts in the interior.Clean with a microfiber cloth.Lightly dampen the cloth with water.Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcoholor solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol orsolvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-dutygrease removers, fuel, or such; this could leadto surface damage.◀

Safety beltsDirty belt straps impede the reeling action andthus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaningDo not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.◀

Seite 227

Care Mobility


Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safetybelts clipped into their buckles.Do not allow the reels to retract the safetybelts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor matsNo objects in the area around the pedalsKeep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;otherwise, the function of the pedals could beimpeded while driving and create the risk of anaccident.Do not place additional floor mats over existingmats or other objects.Only use floor mats that have been approvedfor the vehicle and can be properly fixed inplace.Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐tened again after they were removed for clean‐ing, for example.◀

Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐ger compartment for cleaning.If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with amicrofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back andforth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/camerasTo clean sensors and cameras, use a clothmoistened with a small amount of glasscleaner.

Displays/screensClean the displays with an antistatic microfibercloth.

Cleaning displaysDo not use chemical or household

cleansers.Keep all fluids and moisture away from theunit.Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐ces or electrical components.

Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and donot use abrasive materials; otherwise, damagecan result.◀

Long-term vehicle storageWhen the vehicle is shut down for longer thanthree months, special measures must betaken. Additional information is available fromthe service center.

Seite 228

Mobility Care


Seite 229

Care Mobility


ReferenceThis chapter contains the technical data and an

index that will quickly take you to the informationyou need.


Technical dataVehicle equipmentAll standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series isdescribed in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐


Seite 232

Reference Technical data


Dimensions

BMW 3 Series Touring

Width with mirrors inches/mm 79.9/2,031

Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.3/1,811

Height inches/mm 56.3/1,429

Length inches/mm 182.1/4,627

Wheel base inches/mm 110.6/2,810

Smallest turning circle diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3

Smallest turning circle diameter with xDrive ft/m 38.4/11.7

WeightsThe values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐

lowing the slash apply to vehicles with auto‐matic transmission.

328i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbskg

4,540/4,6052,059/2,089

Load lbs/kg 900/408

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,030/921

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,680/1,216

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 27.5–61.5/495–1,500

Height with xDrive inches/mm 56.5/1,434

Capacities

US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank Gasoline: 15.8/60Diesel: 15/57

Fuel quality, refer topage 186

Seite 233

Technical data Reference


328i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,760/2,159

Load lbs/kg 900/408





328d xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,705/2,134

Load lbs/kg 900/408





Everything from A to ZIndexAABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 115 ACC, Active Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 120 Acceleration Assistant, refer

to Launch Control 73 Accessories and parts 7 Activated-charcoal filter 147 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

tion 112 Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go, ACC 120 Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 114 Adaptive Light Control 91 Additives, oil 202 Adjustments, seats/head re‐

straints 48 After washing vehicle 226 Airbags 95 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 96 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated-air mode 143, 146 Air, dehumidifying, refer to

Cooling function 143, 146 Air distribution,

manual 143, 147 Air flow, air conditioner 143 Air flow, automatic climate

control 147 Air pressure, tires 191 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐

tion 147 Alarm system 42 Alarm, unintentional 43 All around the center con‐

sole 14 All around the headliner 15

All around the steeringwheel 12

All-season tires, refer to Win‐ter tires 197

All-wheel-drive 116 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 150 Alternative oil types 203 Antifreeze, washer fluid 70 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 115 Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC 115 Approved axle load 232 Approved engine oils 203 Arrival time 86 Ash tray 153 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐

tance 220 Assistance when driving

off 119 Assist system information, on

Control Display 88 AUTO intensity 146 Automatic car wash 225 Automatic climate con‐

trol 142 Automatic climate control

with enhanced features 145 Automatic Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 120 Automatic Curb Monitor 56 Automatic deactivation, front

passenger airbags 97 Automatic headlamp con‐

trol 91 Automatic locking 42 Automatic recirculated-air

control 146 Automatic tailgate 37

Automatic transmission withSteptronic 70

AUTO program, automatic cli‐mate control 145

AUTO program, climate con‐trol 143

AUTO program, intensity 146 Auto Start/Stop function 64 Average fuel consumption 85 Average speed 85 Axle loads, weights 232

BBackrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 50 Backrest, width 50 Band-aids, refer to First aid

kit 220 Bar for tow-starting/

towing 223 Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 216 Battery replacement, vehicle

remote control 32 Battery, vehicle 216 Belts, safety belts 51 Beverage holder, cu‐

pholder 161 Blinds, sun protection 45 BMW Advanced Diesel 187 BMW Assist, see user's

manual for Navigation, En‐tertainment and Communi‐cation

BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys‐

tem 205 Bonus range, ECO PRO 176

Seite 234

Reference Everything from A to Z


Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐pholder 161

Brake assistant 115 Brake discs, breaking in 168 Brake force display 114 Brake lamps, brake force dis‐

play 114 Brake lights, adaptive 114 Brake pads, breaking in 168 Braking, hints 169 Breakdown assis‐

tance 219, 220 Breaking in 168 Brightness of Control Dis‐

play 88 Bulb replacement 208 Bulb replacement, front 209 Bulb replacement, halogen

headlamps 209 Bulb replacement, rear 213 Bulb replacement, xenon

headlamps 211 Bulbs and lamps 208 Button, RES 123 Button, Start/Stop 62 Bypassing, refer to Jump-

starting 220

CCalifornia Proposition 65

Warning 7 Camera, care 228 Camera, rearview cam‐

era 132 Camera, Side View 134 Camera, Top View 136 Can holder, refer to Cu‐

pholder 161 Car battery 216 Car care products 226 Care, displays 228 Care, vehicle 226 Cargo 171 Cargo area 155 Cargo area, enlarging 156

Cargo area, storage compart‐ments 162

Cargo cover 155 Cargo, securing 172 Cargo straps, securing

cargo 172 Car key, refer to Remote con‐

trol 32 Carpet, care 228 Car wash 225 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 169 CBS Condition Based Serv‐

ice 205 CD/Multimedia, see user's


Center armrest 160 Center console 14 Central locking system 37 Central screen, refer to Con‐

trol Display 16 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 7 Changing parts 207 Changing wheels 216 Changing wheels/tires 196 Check Control 77 Checking the oil level elec‐

tronically 201 Children, seating position 58 Children, transporting

safely 58 Child restraint fixing sys‐

tem 58 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 59 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 58 Child safety locks 61 Child seat, mounting 58 Child seats 58 Chrome parts, care 227 Cigarette lighter 153 Cleaning, displays 228

Climate control 142, 145 Clock 80 Closing/opening via door

lock 36 Closing/opening with remote

control 35 Clothes hooks 161 Coasting 178 Coasting with engine decou‐

pled, coasting 178 Coasting with idling en‐

gine 178 Cockpit 12 Cold starting, refer to Starting

the engine 63 Collision warning with braking

function 107 Collision warning with City

Braking function 104 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signals 66 Combination switch, refer to

Wiper system 67 Comfort Access 39 COMFORT program, Dy‐

namic Driving Control 118 Compartments in the

doors 160 Compass 151 Computer 84 Condensation on win‐

dows 147 Condensation under the vehi‐

cle 170 Condition Based Service

CBS 205 Configuring drive pro‐

gram 118 Confirmation signal 41 ConnectedDrive, see user's


ConnectedDrive Services Connecting electrical devi‐

ces 153

Seite 235

Everything from A to Z Reference


Control Display 16 Control Display, settings 87 Controller 16, 17 Control systems, driving sta‐

bility 115 Convenient opening 35 Coolant 204 Coolant temperature 79 Cooling function 143, 146 Cooling, maximum 146 Cooling system 204 Corrosion on brake discs 170 Cruise control 126 Cruise control, active with

Stop & Go 120 Cruising range 80 Cupholder 161 Current fuel consumption 81

DDamage, tires 195 Damping control, dy‐

namic 116 Data, technical 232 Date 80 Daytime running lights 91 Defrosting, refer to defrosting

the windows 143 Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 147 Defrosting the windows 143 Dehumidifying, air 143, 146 Destination distance 85 Diesel exhaust fluid, at low

temperatures 188 Diesel exhaust fluid, having

refilled 188 Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐

mum 188 Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐

ishing yourself 188 Diesel particulate filter 169 Digital clock 80 Digital compass 151 Dimensions 232

Dimmable exterior mirrors 56 Dimmable interior rearview

mirror 57 Direction indicator, refer to

Turn signals 66 Display, electronic, instru‐

ment cluster 76 Display in windshield 88 Display lighting, refer to In‐

strument lighting 93 Displays 74 Displays, cleaning 228 Disposal, coolant 204 Disposal, vehicle battery 217 Distance control, refer to

PDC 129 Distance to destination 85 Divided screen view, split

screen 22 Door lock 36 Door lock, refer to Remote

control 32 Drive-off assistant 119 Drive-off assistant, refer to

DSC 115 Driver assistance, refer to In‐

telligent Safety 103 Driving Assistant, refer to In‐

telligent Safety 103 Driving Dynamics Con‐

trol 117 Driving instructions, breaking

in 168 Driving mode 117 Driving notes, general 168 Driving stability control sys‐

tems 115 Driving style analysis 179 Driving tips 168 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 115 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 116 Dynamic Damping Con‐

trol 116

Dynamic Stability ControlDSC 115

Dynamic Traction ControlDTC 116

EECO PRO 175 ECO PRO, bonus range 176 ECO PRO display 175 ECO PRO driving mode 175 ECO PRO driving style analy‐

sis 179 ECO PRO mode 175 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐

struction 177 EfficientDynamics 177 Electronic displays, instru‐

ment cluster 76 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC 115 Emergency detection, remote

control 33 Emergency release, fuel filler

flap 184 Emergency Request 219 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 220 Emergency start function, en‐

gine start 33 Energy Control 81 Energy recovery 81 Engine, automatic Start/Stop

function 64 Engine, automatic switch-

off 64 Engine compartment 199 Engine compartment, work‐

ing in 200 Engine coolant 204 Engine idling when driving,

coasting 178 Engine oil 201 Engine oil, adding 202 Engine oil additives 202 Engine oil change 203

Seite 236



Engine oil filler neck 202 Engine oil temperature 79 Engine oil types, alterna‐

tive 203 Engine oil types, ap‐

proved 203 Engine start during malfunc‐

tion 33 Engine start, jump-start‐

ing 220 Engine start, refer to Starting

the engine 63 Engine stop 63 Engine temperature 79 Entering a car wash 225 Equipment, interior 149 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐

gram, refer to DSC 115 Exchanging wheels/tires 196 Exhaust system 169 Exterior mirror, automatic

dimming feature 56 Exterior mirrors 55 External start 220 External temperature dis‐

play 80 External temperature warn‐

ing 80 Eyes for securing cargo 172

FFailure message, refer to

Check Control 77 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐

tional alarm 43 Fan, refer to Air

flow 143, 147 Fault displays, refer to Check

Control 77 Filler neck for engine oil 202 Fine wood, care 227 First aid kit 220 Fitting for towing, refer to

Tow fitting 223

Flat tire, changingwheels 216

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 101 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 98 Flat tire, warning

lamp 99, 102 Flooding 169 Floor carpet, care 228 Floor mats, care 228 Fogged up windows 143 Fold-out position, windshield

wipers 69 Foot brake 169 Front airbags 95 Front fog lamps 93 Front fog lamps, bulb replace‐

ment 212 Front lamps 209 Front passenger airbags, au‐

tomatic deactivation 97 Front passenger airbags, indi‐

cator lamp 97 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 101 Fuel 186 Fuel cap 184 Fuel consumption, current 81 Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consump‐tion 85

Fuel filler flap 184 Fuel gauge 79 Fuel quality 186 Fuel recommendation 186 Fuel, tank capacity 233 Fuse 217

GGarage door opener, refer to

Universal garage dooropener 149

Gasoline 186 Gear change, automatic

transmission 71 Gear shift indicator 82

General driving notes 168 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐

amic glass sunroof 45 Glove compartment 159 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐

proved 232

HHandbrake, refer to parking

brake 66 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 150 Hazard warning flashers 219 Head airbags 95 Headlamp control, auto‐

matic 91 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐

ture 90 Headlamp flasher 67 Headlamp glass 208 Headlamps 209 Headlamps, care 226 Headlamp washer system 67 Headliner 15 Head restraints 48 Head restraints, front 52 Head restraints, rear 53 Head-up Display 88 Head-up Display, care 228 Heavy cargo, stowing 172 Height, vehicle 232 High-beam Assistant 92 High beams 67 High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam Assistant 92 Hills 170 Hill start assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 119 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 161 Homepage 6 Hood 200 Horn 12 Hot exhaust system 169 HUD Head-up Display 88

Seite 237



Hydroplaning 169

IIce warning, see External

temperature warning 80 Icy roads, see External tem‐

perature warning 80 Identification marks, tires 193 Identification number, refer to

Important features in the en‐gine compartment 199

iDrive 16 Ignition key, refer to Remote

control 32 Ignition off 62 Ignition on 62 Indication of a flat tire 99, 102 Indicator and warning

lamps 77 Individual air distribu‐

tion 143, 147 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 33 Inflation pressure, tires 191 Inflation pressure warning

FTM, tires 101 Info display, refer to Com‐

puter 84 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 99 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 102 Instrument cluster 74 Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 76 Instrument lighting 93 Integrated key 32 Integrated Owner's Manual in

the vehicle 27 Intelligent Emergency Re‐

quest 219 Intelligent Safety 103 Intensity, AUTO pro‐

gram 146 Interior equipment 149

Interior lamps 93 Interior lamps via remote con‐

trol 35 Interior motion sensor 43 Interior rearview mirror, auto‐

matic dimming feature 57 Interior rearview mirror, com‐

pass 151 Interior rearview mirror, man‐

ually dimmable 57 Internet page 6 Interval display, service re‐

quirements 81

JJacking points for the vehicle

jack 216 Joystick, automatic transmis‐

sion 71 Jump-starting 220

KKey/remote control 32 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 39 Key Memory, refer to Per‐

sonal Profile 33 Kickdown, automatic trans‐

mission 71 Knee airbag 95

LLamp replacement 208 Lamp replacement, front 209 Lamp replacement, rear 213 Lamps 90 Lamps and bulbs 208 Lane departure warning 111 Lane margin, warning 111 Language on Control Dis‐

play 87 Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 172

LATCH child restraint fixingsystem 59

Launch Control 73 Leather, care 226 LEDs, light-emitting di‐

odes 208 Length, vehicle 232 Letters and numbers, enter‐

ing 23 Light alloy wheels, care 227 Light control 91 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 208 Lighter 153 Lighting 90 Lighting via remote con‐

trol 35 Light switch 90 Load 172 Loading 171 Lock, door 36 Locking/unlocking via door

lock 36 Locking/unlocking with re‐

mote control 35 Locking, automatic 42 Locking, settings 41 Lock, power window 45 Locks, doors, and win‐

dows 61 Low beams 90 Low beams, automatic, refer

to High-beam Assistant 92 Lower back support 50 Low-Sulfur Diesel 187 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 172 Lumbar support 50

MMaintenance 205 Maintenance require‐

ments 205 Maintenance, service require‐

ments 81

Seite 238



Maintenance system,BMW 205

Malfunction displays, refer toCheck Control 77

Manual air distribu‐tion 143, 147

Manual air flow 143, 147 Manual mode, transmis‐

sion 72 Manual operation, door

lock 36 Manual operation, exterior

mirrors 56 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 184 Manual operation, Park Dis‐

tance Control PDC 130 Manual operation, rearview

camera 132 Manual operation, Side

View 134 Manual operation, Top

View 136 Manual transmission 70 Marking on approved

tires 196 Marking, run-flat tires 197 Master key, refer to Remote

control 32 Maximum cooling 146 Maximum speed, display 82 Maximum speed, winter

tires 197 Measure, units of 88 Medical kit 220 Memory, seat, mirror 54 Menu, EfficientDynamics 177 Menu in instrument clus‐

ter 84 Menus, operating, iDrive 16 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐

ing concept 18 Messages, refer to Check

Control 77 Microfilter 144, 147 Minimum tread, tires 195

Mirror 55 Mirror memory 54 Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 169 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 7 Moisture in headlamp 208 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐

play 16 Mounting of child restraint fix‐

ing systems 58 Multifunction steering wheel,

buttons 12

NNavigation, see user's manual

for Navigation, Entertain‐ment and Communication

Neck restraints, front, refer toHead restraints 52

Neck restraints, rear, refer toHead restraints 53

Neutral cleaner, see wheelcleaner 227

New wheels and tires 196 No Passing Information 82 Nylon rope for tow-starting/

towing 223

OOBD Onboard Diagnosis 205 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐

agnosis 205 Obstacle marking, rearview

camera 133 Octane rating, refer to Rec‐

ommended fuel grade 186 Odometer 80 Office, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainmentand Communication

Oil 201 Oil, adding 202 Oil additives 202

Oil change 203 Oil change interval, service

requirements 81 Oil filler neck 202 Oil types, alternative 203 Oil types, approved 203 Old batteries, disposal 217 Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 16 Onboard vehicle tool kit 207 Opening/closing via door

lock 36 Opening and closing 32 Opening and closing, without

remote control 36 Opening and closing, with re‐

mote control 35 Opening the tailgate with no-

touch activation 40 Operating concept, iDrive 16 Optional equipment, standard

equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Auto‐

matic recirculated-air con‐trol 146

Overheating of engine, referto Coolant temperature 79

PPaint, vehicle 226 Panoramic glass sunroof 45 Parallel parking assistant 137 Park Distance Control

PDC 129 Parked-car ventilation 148 Parked vehicle, condensa‐

tion 170 Parking aid, refer to PDC 129 Parking assistant 137 Parking brake 66 Parking lamps 90 Particulate filter 169 Partition net 157 Parts and accessories 7

Seite 239



Passenger side mirror, tiltingdownward 56

Pathway lines, rearview cam‐era 132

PDC Park Distance Con‐trol 129

Pedestrian warning with citybraking function 109

Personal Profile 33 Personal Profile, exporting

profiles 34 Personal Profile, importing

profiles 35 Pinch protection system,

glass sunroof 46 Pinch protection system, win‐

dows 44 Plastic, care 227 Power failure 216 Power windows 44 Pressure, tire air pres‐

sure 191 Pressure warning FTM,

tires 101 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐

file 33 Programmable memory but‐

tons, iDrive 22 Protective function, glass

sunroof 46 Protective function, win‐

dows 44 Push-and-turn switch, refer to

Controller 16, 17

RRadiator fluid 204 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control 32 Radio ready state 63 Radio, see user's manual for


Rain sensor 68 Rear socket 154

Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐ment 213

Rearview camera 131 Rearview mirror 55 Rear window 39 Rear window de‐

froster 143, 147 Recirculated-air filter 147 Recirculated-air

mode 143, 146 Recommended fuel

grade 186 Recommended tire

brands 196 Refueling 184 Remaining range 80 Remote control/key 32 Remote control, malfunc‐

tion 36 Remote control, univer‐

sal 149 Replacement fuse 217 Replacing parts 207 Replacing wheels/tires 196 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 123 Reserve warning, refer to

Range 80 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 99 Retaining straps, securing

cargo 172 Retreaded tires 196 Roadside parking lamps 91 Roller sunblinds 45 RON recommended fuel

grade 186 Roof load capacity 232 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 172 Rope for tow-starting/

towing 223 RSC Run Flat System Com‐

ponent, refer to Run-flattires 197

Rubber components,care 227

Run-flat tires 197

SSafe braking 169 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder for driv‐

er's seat and front passen‐ger seat 52

Safety belts 51 Safety belts, care 227 Safety switch, windows 45 Safety systems, airbags 95 Saving fuel 174 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐

play 16 Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐

hicle tool kit 207 Screw thread for tow fit‐

ting 224 Seat and mirror memory 54 Seat belts, refer to Safety

belts 51 Seat heating, front 51 Seat heating, rear 51 Seating position for chil‐

dren 58 Seats 48 Selection list in instrument

cluster 84 Selector lever, automatic

transmission 71 Sensors, care 228 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements, Condi‐

tion Based ServiceCBS 205

Service requirements, dis‐play 81

Service, Roadside Assis‐tance 220

Services, ConnectedDrive Settings, locking/unlock‐

ing 41

Seite 240



Settings on Control Dis‐play 87

Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ror 54

Shifting, automatic transmis‐sion 70

Shifting, manual transmis‐sion 70

Shift paddles on steeringwheel 72

Side airbags 95 Side View 134 Signaling, horn 12 Signals when unlocking 41 Sitting safely 48 Size 232 Slide/tilt glass roof 45 Smallest turning circle 232 Snow chains 198 Socket 153 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐

nostics 205 Soot particulate filter 169 SOS button 219 Spare fuse 217 Specified engine oil

types 203 Speed, average 85 Speed limit detection, on‐

board computer 86 Speed limiter, display 82 Speed Limit Information 82 Speed warning 86 Split screen 22 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic

Driving Control 117 Sport automatic transmis‐

sion 72 Sport displays, torque dis‐

play, performance dis‐play 86

SPORT program, DynamicDriving Control 118

Sport program, transmis‐sion 72

Sport steering, variable 117

Stability control systems 115 Start/stop, automatic func‐

tion 64 Start/Stop button 62 Start function during malfunc‐

tion 33 Starting the engine 63 Status control display,

tires 98 Status information, iDrive 21 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering wheel, adjusting 57 Steering wheel heating 57 Steptronic, automatic trans‐

mission 70 Stopping the engine 63 Storage compartment in the

rear 161 Storage compartments 159 Storage compartments, loca‐

tions 159 Storage, tires 197 Storing the vehicle 228 Summer tires, tread 195 Supplementary text mes‐

sage 78 Surround View 131 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐

ing 117 Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 148 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 Symbols 6 Symbols in the status field 21

TTachometer 79 Tailgate, automatic 37 Tailgate opening with no-

touch activation 40 Tailgate via remote con‐

trol 36 Tail lamp 213 Tail lamps 213, 215

Technical changes, refer toSafety 7

Technical data 232 Telephone, see user's manual

for Navigation, Entertain‐ment and Communication

Temperature, automatic cli‐mate control 143, 145

Temperature display for ex‐ternal temperature 80

Temperature, engine oil 79 Tempomat, refer to Active

Cruise Control 120 Terminal, starting aid 221 Text message, supplemen‐

tary 78 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 42 Thigh support 50 Tilt alarm sensor 43 Time of arrival 86 Tire damage 195 Tire identification marks 193 Tire inflation pressure 191 Tire inflation pressure moni‐

tor, refer to FTM 101 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 98 Tires, changing 196 Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 191 Tires, run-flat tires 197 Tire tread 195 Tone, see user's manual for


Tool 207 Top View 135 Total vehicle weight 232 Touchpad 19 Tow fitting 223 Towing 222 Tow-starting 222 Tow truck 222 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor 98

Seite 241



Traction control 116 TRACTION program, Dy‐

namic Driving Control 116 Transmission, automatic 70 Transmission, manual 70 Transporting children

safely 58 Tread, tires 195 Trip computer 86 Triple turn signal activa‐

tion 67 Trip odometer 80 Truck for tow-starting/

towing 222 Turning circle 232 Turning circle lines, rearview

camera 133 Turn signals, operation 66

UUnintentional alarm 43 Units of measure 88 Universal remote control 149 Unlock button, automatic

transmission 71 Unlocking/locking via door

lock 36 Unlocking/locking with re‐

mote control 35 Unlocking, settings 41 Updates made after the edito‐

rial deadline 6 Upholstery care 227 USB interface 154

VVariable sport steering 117 Vehicle battery 216 Vehicle battery, replac‐

ing 216 Vehicle, breaking in 168 Vehicle care 226 Vehicle equipment 6

Vehicle identification number,refer to Identification num‐ber in the engine compart‐ment 199

Vehicle jack 216 Vehicle paint 226 Vehicle storage 228 Vehicle wash 225 Ventilation 147 Ventilation, refer to Parked-

car ventilation 148 Voice activation system 24

WWarning indicators 77 Warning lamps 77 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 77 Warning triangle 220 Washer fluid 70 Washer nozzles, wind‐

shield 69 Washer system 67 Washing, vehicle 225 Water on roads 169 Weights 232 Welcome lamps 90 Wheel base, vehicle 232 Wheel cleaner 227 Wheels, changing 196 Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 191 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 101 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 98 Width, vehicle 232 Window defroster,

rear 143, 147 Windows, powered 44 Windshield washer fluid 70 Windshield washer noz‐

zles 69 Windshield washer sys‐

tem 67

Windshield wiper 67 Windshield wipers, fold-out

position 69 Winter diesel 187 Winter storage, care 228 Winter tires, suitable

tires 197 Winter tires, tread 195 Wiper blades, replacing 207 Wiper fluid 70 Wiper system 67 Wood, care 227 Word match concept, naviga‐

tion 23 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle

tool kit 207

XxDrive 116 Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐

placement 211

Seite 242



More about BMW

bmwusa.comThe Ultimate

Driving Machine

01 4

0 2

925

793

ue

*BL292579300B*


sports wagon. the bmw 3 series - automecanico.netbmw recommends using parts and accesso‐ ries...

Documents